Menu

Acts 27:12 — Word Study

Depth

N1904Ἀνευθέτου δὲ τοῦ λιμένος ὑπάρχοντος πρὸς παραχειμασίαν οἱ πλείονες ἔθεντο βουλὴν ἀναχθῆναι ἐκεῖθεν, εἴ πως δύναιντο καταντήσαντες εἰς Φοίνικα παραχειμάσαι λιμένα τῆς Κρήτης βλέποντα κατὰ λίβα καὶ κατὰ χῶρον.¶

BSAUnsuitableaneuthetos nowde theho harborlimēn [not commodious, unsuitable] beinghuparchō topros winter inparacheimasia [to stay in a place over the cold or rainy season] theho majoritypolus reachedtithēmi a decisionboulē to set sailanagō from there,kakeithen ifei somehowpōs they would be abledunamai having arrivedkatantaō ateis PhoenixPhoinix [Phoenice, a city in Crete] to winter [there] —paracheimazō [to spend the winter season] a harborlimēn [a safe place] <the>ho of CreteKrētē [an island in the Mediterranean] lookingblepō towardkata [the] southwestlips [the southwest wind] andkai towardkata [the] northwest.chōros [the northwest wind]

Word
Listen & take awayActs 27
English ↓ Download MP3 The Berean Standard Bible chapter audio already hosted for the site's Bible section — verse 12 is in this chapter.
Say the word Each Greek word carries its transliteration (chōros) — no per-word recordings of the Greek exist to link to.
Take it away
Acts 27:12quick helps
In a sentenceThe majority decided to sail on from an unsuitable harbor to reach Phoenix for the winter.
Who is speakingThe narrator describes the decision made by the majority of the crew.
Where we areIn the midst of a journey, the crew faces a critical decision about where to winter.
The hard wordἀνευθέτου
Take awayThe harbor was not suitable for wintering, prompting the decision to sail on.
8 commentators on this verse Gill, Jamieson, Poole, Trapp & more — read them › clause subject verbὑπάρχω The sentence as the grammar sees it Open the tree ›
How rare are these words?in the New Testament

5 of 29 occur nowhere else in the New Testament — words chosen on purpose.

Bars are logarithmic — , the commonest word in the Greek New Testament, stands 19,867 times, so a linear scale would leave everything else invisible. Click a row to open that word.

Deep Study — Acts 27:12

Sections marked generated are written from the data on this page rather than by a named author. Everything else — the lexicon entries, the cross references, the manuscript readings, the counts — is quoted from its source unchanged.

Context — Paul's Journey to Romegenerated

11But contrary to Paul’s advice, the centurion was persuaded by the pilot and by the owner of the ship.
12Since the harbor was unsuitable to winter in, the majority decided to sail on, if somehow they could reach Phoenix to winter there. Phoenix was a harbor in Crete facing both southwest and northwest.
13When a gentle south wind began to blow, they thought they had their opportunity. So they weighed anchor and sailed along, hugging the coast of Crete.
14But it was not long before a cyclone called the Northeaster swept down across the island.

Acts 27:12 describes a pivotal moment during Paul's journey to Rome, where the ship's crew must decide whether to stay in an unsuitable harbor or continue sailing. The decision reflects the challenges faced during maritime travel in ancient times, particularly as they sought a safer place to winter. This passage emphasizes the practical concerns of navigation and safety, which are recurrent themes throughout the journey narrative in Acts.


Cross References

ReferenceText (BSB)
1Acts 27:8After we had moved along the coast with difficulty, we came to a place called Fair Havens, near the town of Lasea.
2Psalm 107:30They rejoiced in the silence, and He guided them to the harbor they desired.

The Treasury of Scripture Knowledge — 2 references, hung on the phrase they belong to


The Key Word ἀνευθέτου, aneuthetosgenerated

The Greek word ἀνεύθετος (*aneuthetos*) is an adjective meaning 'unsuitable' or 'inconvenient.' It describes the harbor's lack of suitability for wintering, indicating that it is not a favorable location for ships to dock during the cold season.

This term is derived from a negative particle and a root meaning 'well set,' thus highlighting the harbor's inadequacy for safe anchorage. In this context, it underscores the urgency of finding a more appropriate location for the crew's winter stay.


How Translations Differ — measured against the Berean Standard Biblegenerated

In this study, the verse is primarily analyzed using the Berean Standard Bible (BSB), which uses the term unsuitable to describe the harbor. This is echoed in the Modern Standard Bible (MSB) and New English Translation (NETB).

Other translations differ in their rendering of the harbor's condition. The Authorized Version (KJV) and American Standard Version (ASV) use not commodious, while the Young's Literal Translation (YLT) refers to it as incommodious. These variations reflect different approaches to conveying the harbor's unsuitability.


Sentence Structuregenerated

The verse is structured around a main clause led by the verb ἔθεντο, they decided, which governs several phrases: a noun phrase indicating the subject (the majority), a prepositional phrase describing the harbor's condition, and an infinitive phrase outlining their intended action.

The complexity of the sentence arises from the multiple clauses and phrases that elaborate on the decision-making process, emphasizing the relationship between the harbor's unsuitability and the crew's choice to sail on.


Septuagint Backgroundgenerated

ἀνευθέτου does not have a direct equivalent in the Septuagint, but its meaning of 'unsuitable' can be related to various contexts where locations are described as inadequate for certain purposes.

The term παραχειμάζω, meaning 'to winter,' is used in the Septuagint to describe staying in a place during the winter months, indicating a similar concern for safety and suitability in both the Old and New Testaments.


In plain words — the whole versegenerated

Acts 27:12 describes how the majority of the crew decided to sail on from a harbor that was not suitable for wintering. They aimed to reach Phoenix, a safer harbor in Crete, where they could spend the winter. This decision highlights the challenges faced during their journey.


Frequently Asked Questionsgenerated

Why was the harbor considered unsuitable?

The harbor was deemed unsuitable for wintering due to its poor location, which would not provide adequate shelter from storms and harsh weather conditions.

What was the significance of Phoenix?

Phoenix was a more favorable harbor in Crete where the crew hoped to find better protection during the winter months.

What does the decision to sail on indicate about the crew?

The decision reflects the crew's willingness to take risks in search of safety and better conditions, highlighting their experience and determination.

How does this passage relate to the broader narrative of Paul's journey?

This passage illustrates the challenges and dangers faced during Paul's journey to Rome, emphasizing the reliance on navigation and decision-making in uncertain conditions.


Reflection Questionsgenerated

  1. What challenges have I faced that required me to make difficult decisions, similar to the crew's situation?
  2. How can I discern when to take risks and when to seek safety in my own life?
  3. In what ways do I rely on others when making significant decisions?
  4. How can I apply the lessons of careful planning and consideration from this passage to my own journey?

The early church on this verse — how the Fathers read it

Early church writers have commented on this verse, noting the implications of the crew's decision and Paul's prophetic warnings.

Ammonius of AlexandriaCATENA ON THE ACTS OF THE APOSTLES 27.10 5th–6th c.
Since Paul was a prophet, he announced the danger, which would have threatened them on the ship. But he was not able to convince them to spend the winter in Crete, so that it was not fate that dragged them into danger but their will.
Early Church Fathers on Acts 27 →
BedeRetractions on Acts c. 673–735
If by any means they might reach Phoenix to spend the winter, a port of Crete looking toward the southwest and northwest. The southwest wind, which in Greek is called λίψ, blows between the south and west, inclining;
Early Church Fathers on Acts 27 →

Commentators on this verse — 8 expositors, verse by verse

Each of these wrote on Acts 27:12 itself, not merely on the chapter around it.

John Gill1697–1771Gill's Exposition of the Entire Bible

And because the haven was not commodious to winter in,.... Which was called the "Fair Havens", Acts 27:8 which name it might have by an antiphrasis, it being just the reverse; it might be a good

Read John Gill on Acts 27 →
Robert Jamieson1802–1880Jamieson, Fausset, and Brown's Commentary

And because the haven was not commodious to winter in, the more part advised to depart thence also, if by any means they might attain to Phenice, and there to winter; which is an haven of Crete, and

Read Robert Jamieson on Acts 27 →
Matthew Poole1624–1679Matthew Poole's Commentary on the Holy Bible

This Phenice was a port town in Candia, and not the country in Syria. Lieth toward the south-west and northwest; being on the south part of that island, having a bay or road like unto a half-moon or crescent, one horn or part of it (admitting entrance into it) toward the south-west, and the other toward the north-west.

Read Matthew Poole on Acts 27 →
John Trapp1601–1669Trapp's Complete Commentary on the Old and New Testaments

12 And because the haven was not commodious to winter in, the more part advised to depart thence also, if by any means they might attain to Phenice, and there to winter; which is an haven of Crete, and lieth toward the south west and north west. Ver. 12. And lieth toward the south-west] It is a just complaint that a modern writer maketh of many men’ s spirits among us today; that they lie like this haven, toward the south-west and north-west, two opposite points. (Mr Burroughs, Heart Div.) Methinks it should lie heavy upon those men’ s spirits that first divided us, by publishing and pressing their new fangled fancies.

Read John Trapp on Acts 27 →
Charles John Ellicott1819–1905Ellicott's Commentary for English Readers

(12) And because the haven was not commodious to winter in . . .—The anchorage in the Fair Havens, while it gave immediate shelter from the north-west gales, was open to those from other points of the compass, and it was therefore decided by the majority (there would seem to have been something like a vote taken on the question) to press on and face the immediate risk for the sake of the more permanent advantages. Phenice . . . which is an haven of Crete, and lieth toward the south west and north west.—The precise meaning of the phrase is that the harbour looked, as we say, down these winds, in the direction to which they blew—i.e., that it faced the north-east and south-east, the words…

Read Charles John Ellicott on Acts 27 →
AdamClarkeAdam Clarke's Commentary on the Bible

Verse 12. Might attain to Phoenice] It appears that the Fair Havens were at the eastern end of the island, and they wished to reach Phoenice, which lay farther towards the west. Toward the south-west and north-west.] καταλιβακαικαταχωρον. The libs certainly means the south-west, called libs, from Libya, from which it blows to. wards the AEgean Sea. The chorus, or caurus, means a north-west wind. Virgil mentions this, Geor. iii. ver. 356. Semper hyems, semper spirantes frigora cauri. "It is always winter; and the cauri, the north-westers, ever blowing cold." Dr. Shaw lays down this, and other winds, in a Greek compass, on his map, in which he represents the drifting of St. Paul's vessel from…

Read AdamClarke on Acts 27 →
CambridgeThe Cambridge Bible for Schools and Colleges

12. not commodious to winter in] And this was what they most likely would have to do, wherever they stopped, as the season for sailing was nearly over.to depart thence also] The oldest MSS. do not represent the last word. (R. V. “to put to sea from thence).” The word is the technical term, and not the ordinary word for “depart.”they might attain to Phenice] (R. V. “they could reach Phœnix.”) Phœnix is no doubt the correct orthography of the name. The place is mentioned both by Strabo and Ptolemy, and has been identified with the modern port of Lutro (Spratt’s Crete ii. 250 seqq.).and lieth toward the south west and north west] [R. V. looking north-east and south-east) The original is…

Read Cambridge on Acts 27 →
Albert Barnes1798–1870Barnes' Notes on the Bible

The haven - The fair havens, Acts 27:8. Was not commodious to winter in - Not safe or convenient to remain there.

Read Albert Barnes on Acts 27 →

The verse in English, compared — 16 translations, and where they part company

Every translation on this page is a decision someone had to make and commit to. Read down a column and you see one translator's judgement; read across a row and you see the range the Greek actually allows. The BSB is the wording the rest of this page is measured against, so it is listed first.

Modern formal

BSBBerean Standard Bible2020

Since the harbor was unsuitable to winter in, the majority decided to sail on, if somehow they could reach Phoenix to winter there. Phoenix was a harbor in Crete facing both southwest and northwest.

WEBWorld English Bible2000

Because the haven was not suitable to winter in, the majority advised going to sea from there, if by any means they could reach Phoenix and winter there, which is a port of Crete, looking southwest and northwest.

MSBMajority Standard Bible2022

Since the harbor was unsuitable to winter in, the majority decided to sail on, hoping that somehow they could reach Phoenix to winter there. Phoenix was a harbor in Crete facing both southwest and northwest.

NETBNew English Translation2006

Because the harbor was not suitable to spend the winter in, the majority decided to put out to sea from there. They hoped that somehow they could reach Phoenix, a harbor of Crete facing southwest and northwest, and spend the winter there.

Tyndale line

KJVKing James Version1611

And because the haven was not commodious to winter in, the more part advised to depart thence also, if by any means they might attain to Phenice, and there to winter; which is an haven of Crete, and lieth toward the south west and north west.

ASVAmerican Standard Version1901

And because the haven was not commodious to winter in, the more part advised to put to sea from thence, if by any means they could reach Phoenix, and winter there; which is a haven of Crete, looking north-east and south-east.

RVARevised Version, American1894

And because the haven was not commodious to winter in, the more part advised to put to sea from thence, if by any means they could reach Phoenix, and winter there; which is a haven of Crete, looking north-east and south-east.

NWBWebster's Bible1833

And because the haven was not commodious to winter in, the greater part advised to depart thence also, if by any means they might attain to Phenice, and there to winter; which is a haven of Crete, and lieth towards the south-west and north-west.

GNVGeneva Bible1599

And because the hauen was not commodious to winter in, many tooke counsell to depart thence, if by any meanes they might attaine to Phenice, there to winter, which is an hauen of Candie, and lyeth toward the Southwest and by West, and Northwest and by West.

Strictly literal

DBYDarby Translation1890

And the harbour being ill adapted to winter in, the most counselled to set sail thence, if perhaps they might reach Phoenice to winter in, a port of Crete looking north-east and south-east.

YLTYoung's Literal Translation1862

and the haven being incommodious to winter in, the more part gave counsel to sail thence also, if by any means they might be able, having attained to Phenice, [there] to winter, [which is] a haven of Crete, looking to the south-west and north-west,

LSVLiteral Standard Version2020

and the haven being not well placed to winter in, the greater part gave counsel to sail from there, if somehow they might be able, having attained to Phoenix, to winter [there], [which is] a haven of Crete, looking to the southwest and northwest,

ULBUnlocked Literal Bible2017

Because the harbor was not easy to spend the winter in, most of the sailors advised to sail from there, if by any means we could reach the city of Phoenix, to spend the winter there. Phoenix is a harbor in Crete, and it faces northeast and southeast.

From the Latin

DRADouay-Rheims (Challoner)1899

And whereas it was not a commodious haven to winter in, the greatest part gave counsel to sail thence, if by any means they might reach Phenice to winter there, which is a haven of Crete, looking towards the southwest and northwest.

Simplified

FBVFree Bible Version2020

Since the harbor was not large enough to over winter in, the majority were in favor of leaving and trying if possible to reach Phoenix and spend the winter there—a harbor in Crete that faces northwest and southwest.

BBEBible in Basic English1949

And as the harbour was not a good one in which to be for the winter, the greater number of them were for going out to sea, in order, if possible, to put in for the winter at Phoenix, a harbour of Crete, looking to the north-east and south-east.

Word by word, the decisions they made

λιμένοςlimēn harbor G3040 3 different renderings
not commodiousASV GNV KJV NWB RVA
harborFBV NETB ULB
unsuitableBSB MSB
ὑπάρχοντοςhuparchō being G5225 3 different renderings
wasASV BSB DRA GNV KJV MSB NETB NWB RVA ULB WEB
beingDBY LSV YLT
wereBBE FBV
πλείονεςpolus majority G4119 6 different renderings
majorityBSB FBV MSB NETB WEB
moreASV KJV RVA YLT
mostDBY ULB
greater partLSV NWB
manyGNV
greater numberBBE
ἔθεντοtithēmi reached G5087 2 different renderings
putASV BBE NETB RVA
placedLSV
ἀναχθῆναιanagō to set sail G321 2 different renderings
sailBSB DRA LSV MSB ULB YLT
to set sailDBY
ἐκεῖθεν,kakeithen from there, G1564 2 different renderings
thereASV BSB DRA FBV GNV KJV MSB NWB RVA YLT
from thereLSV NETB ULB WEB

Counted from the translations carried on this site, not from a survey of every English Bible. A rendering shared by many versions is usually inherited rather than independently arrived at — the Tyndale line in particular runs through most of them.


The sentence as the grammar sees it — from the Nestle 1904 treebank

This is not our own analysis: it is the scholarly syntax tree for the verse, showing how the clause actually holds together.

clauseδὲnowclausepredicateἀνευθέτουUnsuitablenoun phrase · subjectτοῦtheλιμένοςharborlinking verbὑπάρχοντοςbeingprepositional phrase · adverbialπρὸςtoπαραχειμασίανwinter inclausenoun phrase · subjectοἱtheπλείονεςmajorityverbἔθεντοreachedobjectβουλὴνa decisionclause · adverbialverbἀναχθῆναιto set sailadverbialἐκεῖθενfrom thereclauseεἴifclauseπωςsomehowclauseverbδύναιντοthey might be ableclause · objectclause · adverbialverbκαταντήσαντεςhaving arrivedprepositional phrase · adverbialεἰςatnoun phraseΦοίνικαPhoenixnoun phrasenoun phraseλιμέναa harbornoun phraseτῆς-Κρήτηςof Creteadjective phraseclauseverbβλέπονταlookingprepositional phrase · adverbialprepositional phraseκατὰtowardλίβα[the] southwestκαὶandprepositional phraseκατὰtowardχῶρον[the] northwestverbπαραχειμάσαιto winter [there]

Boxes are the grammarian's groupings — clause, noun phrase, prepositional phrase.


The earliest translations — Latin and Syriac

Every translation is an argument about meaning made by someone who had to commit to one. These two were made while the Greek was still a living language, and they are the oldest opinions we have about what this verse says.

Latin VulgateAD 382–405

Et cum aptus portus non esset ad hiemandum, plurimi statuerunt consilium navigare inde, si quomodo possent, devenientes Phœnicen hiemare, portum Cretæ respicientem ad Africum et ad Corum.

Jerome revised the Old Latin against the Greek from AD 382; the Latin west read this text for a thousand years.

Syriac Peshittaby AD 400

ܘܡܛܠ ܕܠܐ ܥܗܢ ܗܘܐ ܗܘ ܠܡܐܢܐ ܠܡܣܬܝܘ ܒܗ ܣܬܘܐ ܣܓܝܐܐ ܡܢܢ ܨܒܝܢ ܗܘܘ ܕܢܪܕܐ ܡܢ ܬܡܢ ܘܐܢܗܘ ܕܡܫܟܚܝܢ ܕܢܡܢܥܘܢ ܘܢܣܬܘܢ ܒܠܡܐܢܐ ܚܕ ܕܐܝܬܘܗܝ ܗܘܐ ܒܩܪܛܐ ܘܡܬܩܪܐ ܗܘܐ ܦܘܢܟܣ ܘܚܐܪ ܗܘܐ ܠܬܝܡܢܐ

The Bible of the Syriac-speaking church, in the language nearest to the Aramaic Jesus spoke.

Shown verse by verse rather than word by word: aligning a Greek word to its Latin or Syriac counterpart automatically would be guesswork, and a wrong alignment is worse than none.


The Greek editions compared — what the manuscripts actually say

Eight printed editions of the Greek New Testament, side by side. Where they agree the wording is settled; where a word is missing from an edition it is marked, so you can see the difference rather than take it on trust.

Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

Ἀνευθέτου δὲ τοῦ λιμένος ὑπάρχοντος πρὸς παραχειμασίαν οἱ πλείονες ἔθεντο βουλὴν ἀναχθῆναι ἐκεῖθεν, εἴ πως δύναιντο καταντήσαντες εἰς Φοίνικα παραχειμάσαι λιμένα τῆς Κρήτης βλέποντα κατὰ λίβα καὶ κατὰ χῶρον.¶

The standard critical text of the New Testament.

Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

Ἀνευθέτου δὲ τοῦ λιμένος ὑπάρχοντος πρὸς παραχειμασίαν οἱ πλείονες ἔθεντο βουλὴν ἀναχθῆναι ἐκεῖθεν, εἴ πως δύναιντο καταντήσαντες εἰς Φοίνικα παραχειμάσαι λιμένα τῆς Κρήτης βλέποντα κατὰ λίβα καὶ κατὰ χῶρον.¶

The previous edition, still widely cited.

SBL Greek New Testament2010 · Michael Holmes

Ἀνευθέτου δὲ τοῦ λιμένος ὑπάρχοντος πρὸς παραχειμασίαν οἱ πλείονες ἔθεντο βουλὴν ἀναχθῆναι ἐκεῖθεν, εἴ πως δύναιντο καταντήσαντες εἰς Φοίνικα παραχειμάσαι λιμένα τῆς Κρήτης βλέποντα κατὰ λίβα καὶ κατὰ χῶρον.¶

The Society of Biblical Literature edition, freely licensed.

Westcott–Hort1881 · Westcott and Hort

Ἀνευθέτου δὲ τοῦ λιμένος ὑπάρχοντος πρὸς παραχειμασίαν οἱ πλείονες ἔθεντο βουλὴν ἀναχθῆναι ἐκεῖθεν, εἴ πως δύναιντο καταντήσαντες εἰς Φοίνικα παραχειμάσαι λιμένα τῆς Κρήτης βλέποντα κατὰ λίβα καὶ κατὰ χῶρον.¶

The edition that turned scholarship toward the earliest manuscripts.

Tregelles1857–1879 · Samuel Prideaux Tregelles

Ἀνευθέτου δὲ τοῦ λιμένος ὑπάρχοντος πρὸς παραχειμασίαν οἱ πλείονες ἔθεντο βουλὴν ἀναχθῆναι ἐκεῖθεν, εἴ πως δύναιντο καταντήσαντες εἰς Φοίνικα παραχειμάσαι λιμένα τῆς Κρήτης βλέποντα κατὰ λίβα καὶ κατὰ χῶρον.¶

An independent critical text built from the oldest witnesses then known.

Tyndale House Greek NT2017 · Tyndale House, Cambridge

Ἀνευθέτου δὲ τοῦ λιμένος ὑπάρχοντος πρὸς παραχειμασίαν οἱ πλείονες ἔθεντο βουλὴν ἀναχθῆναι ἐκεῖθεν, εἴ πως δύναιντο καταντήσαντες εἰς Φοίνικα παραχειμάσαι λιμένα τῆς Κρήτης βλέποντα κατὰ λίβα καὶ κατὰ χῶρον.¶

A recent critical edition following documentary evidence closely.

Byzantine majority text2018 · Robinson–Pierpont

Ἀνευθέτου δὲ τοῦ λιμένος ὑπάρχοντος πρὸς παραχειμασίαν οἱ πλείονες ἔθεντο βουλὴν ἀναχθῆναι εἴ πως δύναιντο καταντήσαντες εἰς Φοίνικα παραχειμάσαι λιμένα τῆς Κρήτης βλέποντα κατὰ λίβα καὶ κατὰ χῶρον.¶

The reading of the majority of surviving manuscripts.

Textus Receptus1550/1894 lineage

Ἀνευθέτου δὲ τοῦ λιμένος ὑπάρχοντος πρὸς παραχειμασίαν οἱ πλείονες ἔθεντο βουλὴν ἀναχθῆναι πως δύναιντο καταντήσαντες εἰς Φοίνικα παραχειμάσαι λιμένα τῆς Κρήτης βλέποντα κατὰ λίβα καὶ κατὰ χῶρον.¶

The printed tradition behind the King James Version.

Every witness on this verse they differ
Critical editions
Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993SBL Greek New Testament2010Westcott–Hort1881Tregelles1857–1879Tyndale House Greek NT2017
Byzantine / Majority
Byzantine majority text2018
Received Text
Textus Receptus1550/1894

A witness that read differently would show its variant word here, marked.

Word by word, across the editions

WordEditions carrying itMissing from
ἐκεῖθεν, from there,NA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, TregTR, Byz
εἴ ifNA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, Treg, ByzTR

Apparatus — SBL Greek New Testament, CC BY 4.0


The map of this verse — what each word keeps company with

This is a map of two things, both counted rather than judged. Company kept: which words stand within three words of each of these, anywhere in the Greek New Testament — the thicker the line, the more often the pair meet compared with chance. Built from: the words a word is made out of, taken from its own Strong’s entry. It is not a map of meaning: nothing here claims two words mean the same thing. Click any circle to see the numbers behind it.

Acts 27:12ἀνεύθετοςUnsuitableUnsuitableἀνεύθετοςδέnownowδέthetheλιμήνharborharborλιμήνὑπάρχωbeingbeingὑπάρχωπρόςtotoπρόςπαραχειμασίαwinter inwinter inπαραχειμασίαthetheπλειουςmajoritymajorityπλειουςτίθημιreachedreachedτίθημιβουλήa decisiona decisionβουλήἀνάγωto set sailto set sailἀνάγωἐκεῖθενfrom there,from there,ἐκεῖθενεἰififεἰπωςsomehowsomehowπωςδύναμαιthey would they would be aδύναμαικαταντάωhaving arrihaving arrivedκαταντάωεἰςatatεἰςΦοῖνιξPhoenixPhoenixΦοῖνιξπαραχειμάζωto winter [to winter [therπαραχειμάζωλιμήνa harbora harborλιμήν<the><the>Κρήτηof Creteof CreteΚρήτηβλέπωlookinglookingβλέπωκατάtowardtowardκατάλίψ[the] south[the] southwestλίψκαίandandκαίκατάtowardtowardκατάχῶρος (II)[the] north[the] northwestχῶρος (II)κατάPrep. downPrep. down fromκατάἄλφαletter theletter the firsἄλφαὑπόPrep. by, Prep. by, underὑπόπαραχειμάζωv. I pass v. I pass the wπαραχειμάζωἵστημιv. I causev. I cause to sἵστημιβούλομαιv. I will,v. I will, inteβούλομαιἀνάPrep. and,Prep. and, apieἀνάἐκεῖAdv there,Adv there, yondἐκεῖεἰ δὲ μήNeg.prt. bNeg.prt. but ifεἰ δὲ μήπαράPrep. fromPrep. from, in παράπρόPrep. befoPrep. beforeπρόπολύςAdj much, Adj much, many,πολύςφοῖνιξn.m. a paln.m. a palm treφοῖνιξὀπτάνομαιv. I appeav. I appear, amὀπτάνομαιὄναρn.indcl. an.indcl. a dreaὄναρτάξιςn.f. ordern.f. order, posτάξιςζηλωτήςn.m. a zean.m. a zealotζηλωτήςχωρίονn.n. a plan.n. a place, pχωρίον
meets it a little oftener than chancemeets it far oftener than chancebuilt from the same roottwo words of the verse share ita word of this versea related word

Lexicons — every word in Acts 27:12

One dossier per word, with every reference work grouped by kind — Greek lexicons, morphology, Bible dictionaries, topical chains and the English of the translators themselves. The verse sits at the head of each block with the word under study lit, so you never lose your place. The panel above gives the short answer; this is the long one, and it is the part of the page worth indexing.

Every entry below is the lexicographer's own text. Imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, the full Liddell-Scott-Jones, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate LSJ, Robinson and Packard on the Greek, Webster and Cawdrey on the English the translators were using. Where a cell says a work has no entry, that work genuinely has none for this word.

Unsuitable now the harbor being to winter in the majority reached a decision to set sail from there, if somehow they would be able having arrived at Phoenix to winter [there] — a harbor <the> of Crete looking toward [the] southwest and toward [the] northwest.
Ἀνευθέτουaneuthetos Unsuitable G428 Adjective · genitive · singular · masculine
1× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Describing something as unsuitable or not convenient, like in Acts 27:12, where a harbor is not well-placed for spending the winter.
Tyndale gloss
unsuitable
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἀνεύθετος (*aneuthetos*) is an adjective meaning 'inconvenient' or 'unsuitable.' It is derived from a negative particle and a root meaning 'well set.' This term appears in Acts 27:12, where it describes a location that is not favorable for harboring.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

*† ἀν-εύ-θετος, -ον

(v. MM, VGT, s.v.),

not well placed, not fit: Ac 27:12.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀν-εύ-θετος, -ov, not convenient, not commodious, not fil: Acts xxvii.12. (Unused by Grk. writ.; [Moschion 53].)

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἀνεύθετος, Gr. εἰρ. in Ac 2715, is another new word made with wzwhich may or may not have been first used by Luke. The simplex is found in Lk 9®, 14%, and in Heb 67.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀνεύθετος (aneuthetos) — unsuitable.

ἀνεύθετος, ον,

inconvenient, λιμὴν ἀ. πρὸς παραχειμασίαν[NT]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀνεύθετος

aneuthetos

from 1 (as a negative particle) and 2111; not well set, i.e.

inconvenient:--not commodious.

see GREEK for 1

see GREEK for 2111

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀνεύθετος, ον

Adj

unsuitable, inconvenient

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀνεύθετος aneuthetos 1x

unfavorably situated, inconvenient, Acts 27:12*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀνεύθετος inconvenient, NTest.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-GSM — Adjective · genitive · singular · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-GSM Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
100%unsuitable
unsuitable100% · 1×

1 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

Concordanceἀνεύθετος · 1× in the New Testament
Acts
Across the New Testament1 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Unsuitable now the harbor being to winter in the majority reached a decision to set sail from there, if somehow they would be able having arrived at Phoenix to winter [there] — a harbor <the> of Crete looking toward [the] southwest and toward [the] northwest.
δὲde now G1161 Conjunction
2,787× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This is a conjunction that means and, but, or then, used to connect ideas like in Matthew 1:2 and 2 Corinthians 6:15.
Tyndale gloss
then
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

δέ (de) is a post-positive particle in Greek, primarily used as a conjunction to connect clauses. It can express contrast (but, on the other hand) or continuation (and, also), and is often used to transition between ideas or to add emphasis. In the New Testament, it appears frequently in various contexts, such as contrasting statements or resuming interrupted discourse, with notable examples in Matthew and 2 Corinthians.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

δέ (before vowels δ’; on the general neglect of the elision in NT, v. WH, App., 146; Tdf., Pr., 96),

post-positive conjunctive particle;

copulative, but, in the next place, and, now (Abbott, JG, 104): Mt 1:2ff., II Co 6:15, 16, II Pe 1:5-7; in repetition for emphasis, Ro 3:21, 22, 9:30, I Co 2:6, Ga 2:2, Phl 2:8; in transition to something new, Mt 1:18 2:19, Lk 13:1, Jo 7:14, Ac 6:1, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

δέ (related to δή, as μέν to μήν, ef. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 355), a particle adversative, distinctive, disjunctive, but, moreover, (W.§ 53, 7 and 10, 2); it is much more freq. in the historical parts of the N. T. than in the other books, very rare in the Epp. of John and the Apocalypse. {On its general neglect of elision (when the next word begins with a vowel) cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 96; WH. App. Ῥ 146; W.§5,1a.; B. p.10sq.] It is used ἘΠ ΟἹ δὲ univ. by way of opposition and distinction; it is added to statements opp. to a preceding statement: ἐὰν yap ἀφῆτε... ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀφῆτε, Mt. vi. 14 sq.; ἐὰν de ὁ ὀφθαλμὸς κτλ. Mt. vi. 23; ἐλεύσονται δὲ ἡμέραι, Mk. ii. 20; it opposes persons to persons or things previously mentioned or thought of, —either with strong emphasis: ἐγὼ δέ, Mt. v. 22, 28, 32, 34, 39,44; ἡμεῖς de, 1 Co. i. 23; 2 Co. x. 13; σὺ δέ, Mt. vi. 6; ὑμεῖς δέ, Mk. viii. 29; of δὲ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

δεῖ. For the conjunctive, as in Mt 26%, cf. P Fay 109° (early i/A.D.) ἐάν σε δῇ (for δέῃ) τὸ εἱμάτιόν σου θεῖναι ἐνέχυρον. “even if you have to pawn your cloak” (Edd.). In P Tebt I. 585° (B.c. 111) we have ἐάν followed by the indicative— ἐὰν δεῖ σε συνπεσεῖν τῶι ᾿Ανικήτωι, σύνπεσαι, ‘if you must meet Anicetus, meet him” (Edd.): cf. Mayser G7. p. 325. Other examples of the verb are l’ Par 461® (B.C. 153) διὸ Kal ἡγούμενος δεῖν ἐπ᾿ ἄλλου μὲν μηθενὸς αὐτῶι διακριθῆναι» P Lille I. 267 (iii.B.c.) περὶ (corr. from πεερὶ) δὲ τούτου τοῦ μέρους δεήσει ἐπισχεῖν, P Tebt 11. 3414 (A.p. 140-1) δεήσι ἐπισταλῆναι εἰς δάνε[ι]α σπέρματα κατασπίο]ρᾶς KTA., “ΕἼ will be necessary to send on account of loans of seedcorn for the sowing,” etc., AécheZ 1001" © (Theran Doric —c. B.C. 200) no one may bring forward a proposal ὡς δεείσῃ διαλῦσαι τὸ κοινὸν εἰ τὰς θυσίας, P Flor II. 133" (A.D. 257) ἔδι μὲν ὑμᾶς μηδὲ…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

δέ (de) — then.

δέ,

but: adversative and copulative Particle,

I. answering to μέν (which see), τὴν νῦν μὲν Βοιωτίαν, πρότερον δὲ Καδμηίδα γῆν καλουμένην [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II. without preceding μέν,

II.1. adversative, expressing distinct opposition, αἰεί τοι τὰ κάκ᾽ ἐστὶ φίλα.. μαντεύεσθαι, ἐσθλὸν δ᾽ οὔτε τί πω εἶπας[Refs 5th c.BC+]; so in Prose, οὐκ ἐπὶ κακῷ, ἐλευθερώσει δέ.. [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II.2. copulative,

II.2. a in explanatory clauses, ξυνέβησαν.. τὰ μακρὰ τείχη ἑλεῖν (ἦν δὲ σταδίων μάλιστα ὀκτώ) [Refs 8th c.BC+]: when a substantive is followed by words in apposition, Ἀρισταγόρῃ τῷ Μιλησίῳ, δούλῳ δὲ ἡμετέρῳ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so in answers, διπλᾶ λέγειν. —Answ. διπλᾶδ᾽ ὁρᾶν…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

δέ

de

a primary particle (adversative or continuative); but, and,

etc.:--also, and, but, moreover, now (often unexpressed in English).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

δέ

Cj.

but, on the other hand, and

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

δέ de 2x

a conjunctive particle, marking the superaddition of a clause, whether in opposition or in continuation, to what has preceded, and it may be variously rendered but, on the other hand, and, also, now, etc.; καὶ δέ, when there is a special superaddition in continuation, too, yea, etc. It sometimes is found at the commencement of the apodosis of a sentence, Acts 11:17. It serves also to mark the resumption of an interrupted discourse, 2 Cor. 2:10; Gal. 2:6

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

δέ but: conjunctive Particle, with adversative force: it commonly answers to μέν, and may often be rendered by while, whereas, on the other hand, v. μέν:— but μέν is often omitted, δέ being used merely to pass on from one thing to another; ὣς Ἀχιλεὺς θάμβησεν, θάμβησαν δὲ καὶ ἄλλοι Il.; etc.; κινεῖ κραδίην κινεῖ δὲ χόλον Eur.

δέ is often redundant,

to introduce the apodosis, where it may be rendered by then, yet, εἰ δέ κε μὴ δώωσιν, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι if they will not give it, then I will take it, Il.; so at in Lat., si tu oblitus es, at Dii meminerint Catull.

to resume after interruption caused by a parenthesis, where it may be rendered by I say, now, so then, Hdt.

POSITION of δέ: properly second, being often put between the Art. and Subst., the prep. and case.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
33%now
now33% · 974×however27% · 780×then21% · 620×and12% · 360×but5% · 154×other renderings2% · 49×

2,937 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 15 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,787 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existσύ
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςκύριοςlord, Lord, mastπεντακισχίλιοιfive thousand
εἰCond
παλαιόςold, ancient, woσύεἰμίI am, exist
εἰμίI am, exist
περιπατέωI walk, conduct ἀναπίπτωI lie down, reclμνημεῖονa tomb, sepulche
οὗτος
δίδωμιI offer, giveθεόςGod, a godπίστιςfaith, belief, t
δέnow2787×
what comes after →
Article the
ἸησοῦςJesusθεόςGod, a godκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
αὐτός
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐπί
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theσύ
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theοὗτοςἸωάννηςJohn
τὶς
Article theαὐτόςὄνομαname, character,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceδέ · 2,787× in the New Testament
Acts Luke Matthew 1 Corinthians John Mark Romans 2 Corinthians Hebrews Galatians James 1 Timothy

2 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Unsuitable now the harbor being to winter in the majority reached a decision to set sail from there, if somehow they would be able having arrived at Phoenix to winter [there] — a harbor <the> of Crete looking toward [the] southwest and toward [the] northwest.
τοῦho the G3588 Article · genitive · singular · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-GSM — Article · genitive · singular · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-GSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

Unsuitable now the harbor being to winter in the majority reached a decision to set sail from there, if somehow they would be able having arrived at Phoenix to winter [there] — a harbor <the> of Crete looking toward [the] southwest and toward [the] northwest.
λιμένοςlimēn harbor G3040 Noun · genitive · singular · masculine
3× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Havens refer to a harbor or safe place, as seen in Acts 27:8. It involves a protected area for ships to dock, often used as a refuge. This term is used to describe various locations in the Bible.
Amplified meaning
not commodious, unsuitable
Tyndale gloss
Havens
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

λιμήν is a masculine noun meaning 'harbor' or 'haven.' It can refer to a physical port or a metaphorical place of refuge. The New Testament uses it in Acts 27:8, 12, where it describes locations for ships. The lexicons agree on its primary meaning but also note its broader metaphorical uses, such as a retreat or refuge.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

λιμήν, -ένος, ὁ,

[in LXX: Ps 106 (107):30 (מָחוֹז), Ps 106 (107):35, I Es 5:55, I, II, IV Mac7*;]

a harbour, haven: Ac 27:8, 12 (cf. Καλοὶ Λιμένες).†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

λιμήν, -ένος, ὁ, [allied with λίμνη, q. v.; fr. Hom. down], a harbor, haven: Acts xxvii. 8, 12; see καλοὶ λιμένες, p. 322%.

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

λιμήν. P Petr II. 4511: 19 (B.c 246) ὁ ἐν Σελευκεί[αι λ]ιμήν, P Amh 11. 1161 (A.D. 178) τετέλίεσται) . . « λιμένος Μέμφεως, ‘© paid the tax for the harbour of Memphis.”’

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

λιμήν (limēn) — Havens.

λῐμήν, ένσς, ὁ,

harbour, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Κανθάρου λ. a dockyard in the Piraeus, with a pun on κάνθαρος just above, [Refs 8th c.BC+] havens of refuge from the sea, [Refs 8th c.BC+]

II. metaphorically, haven, retreat, refuge, [Refs 6th c.BC+]; ἑταιρείας λ. a haven of friendship, [Refs 5th c.BC+] from ills, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II.2. gathering-place, receptacle, πλούτου λ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ἅιδου λ. harbour of death, [Refs]; ξείνων αἰδοῖοι λιμένες [Refs 5th c.BC+]; βοῆς τῆς σῆς ποῖος οὐκ ἔσται λ.; what place shall not harbour (i.e. receive) thy cry? [Refs 5th c.BC+]

III. ={ἀγορά} in Thessaly and Paphos, [Refs 1st c.AD+]

IV. the source of birth, womb, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

λιμήν

limen

apparently a primary word; a harbor:--haven. Compare 2568.

see GREEK for 2568

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

λιμήν, ένος, ὁ

n.m.

a harbor, port

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

λιμήν limēn 3x

a port, haven, harbor, Καλὰ Λιμένες, Acts 27:8, 12*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

λιμήν λι^μήν, ένος, ὁ, a harbour, haven, creek, whereas ὅρμος is properly the inner part of the harbour, the landing-place, Hom., etc.; in pl., Od., Soph., etc.; —also c. gen. objecti, λιμένες θαλάσσης havens of refuge from the sea, Od.

metaph. a haven, retreat, refuge, Theogn.; ἑταιρείας λ. a haven of friendship, Soph.; λ. τῶν ἐμῶν βουλευμάτων Eur.; c. gen. objecti, χείματος λ. a harbour of refuge from the storm, id. Eur.

a place of resort, receptacle, πλούτου λ. Aesch.; παντὸς οἰωνοῦ λ. Soph.; in O. T. 420, the sense seems to be—how will Cithaeron not be filled with thy cries (λιμὴν ἔσται τῆς σῆς βοῆς) ? how will it not reecho them?

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-GSM — Noun · genitive · singular · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
67%harbor
harbor67% · 2×havens33% · 1×

3 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
predicate33%subject33%adverbial33%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 3 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καλόςbeautiful, good, wor
καλέωI call, invite,
Article the
δέbut, on the othe
παραχειμάζωI pass the winter
ΦοῖνιξPhoenix
λιμήνharbor
what comes after →
ὅς
ἐγγύςnear
ὑπάρχωI am, exist, am in p
πρός
Article the
ΚρήτηCrete

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceλιμήν · 3× in the New Testament
Acts
Across the New Testament1 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Sacrifices of Abel and Cain 90c. AD 40

οὐχ ἵνα σάλον καὶ τροπὴν καὶ κλύδωνα ὧδε κἀκεῖσε φορούμενος ἀστάτως ὑπομένῃς, ἀλλ’ ἵνα τοῦ σάλου παυσάμενος αἰθρίαν καὶ γαλήνην ἀγάγῃς καὶ ὥσπερ εἰς ὑπόδρομον ἢ ὕφορμον ἢ ναυλοχώτατον λιμένα

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 11.78c. AD 75–95

ἤρξαντο δὲ καὶ τῆς οἰκοδομίας τοῦ ναοῦ πολλὰ τοῖς τε λατόμοις καὶ τέκτοσι χρήματα δόντες καὶ τὰ πρὸς τροφὴν τῶν εἰσαγομένων, τοῖς τε Σιδωνίοις ἡδὺ καὶ κοῦφον ἦν τά τε κέδρινα κατάγουσιν ἐκ τοῦ Λιβάνου ξύλα δήσασιν αὐτὰ καὶ σχεδίαν πηξαμένοις εἰς τὸν…

Ignatius of AntiochThe Letters of Ignatius 6.11.3c. AD 110

ἐφάνη μοι οὖν θεοῦ ἄξιον πρᾶγμα, πέμψαι τινὰ τῶν ὑμετέρων μετ̓ ἐπιστολῆς, ἵνα συνδοξάσῃ τὴν κατὰ θεὸν αὐτοῖς γενομένην εὐδίαν, καὶ ὅτι λιμένος ἤδη ἐτύγχανον τῇ προσευχῇ ὑμῶν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD
P.Customs 188Soknopaiu Nesos (Arsinoites)AD 59

πάρες διὰ πύλης Νήσου Σοκνοπαίου λιμένος Μέμφεως Στοτοήθι ἐλαίου ὄνον ἕνα μετρητὴν ἕνα ἥμισυ, γίνεται μετρητὴς α 𐅵. ἔτους πέμπτου

P.Aberd. 42 e descr.Philadelphia (Arsinoites)AD 106

πάρες διὰ πύλης Φιλαδελφίας λιμένος Μέμφεως Ἀντωνίῳ … τρισὶ πυροῦ ἀρτάβας δεκαδύο, γίνονται πυροῦ ἀρτάβαι ιβ. ἔτους ἐνάτου Τραιανοῦ

P.Fay. 174 descr.Bakchias (Arsinoites)AD 125

τετελώνηται διὰ πύλης Βακχιάδος λιμένος Μέμφεως Νιννᾶς ἐξάγων φοίνικος ὄνον ἕνα ἀρτάβας τέσσαρας . ἔτους ἐνάτου Τραιανοῦ Ἁδριανοῦ τοῦ

Unsuitable now the harbor being to winter in the majority reached a decision to set sail from there, if somehow they would be able having arrived at Phoenix to winter [there] — a harbor <the> of Crete looking toward [the] southwest and toward [the] northwest.
ὑπάρχοντοςhuparchō being G5225 Verb · present · active · participle · genitive · singular · masculine
60× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To be already in existence, like something or someone that was present from the start. It appears in Acts 19:40 and 27:12, describing things that were already happening. It can also mean to be ready or at hand.
Tyndale gloss
be already
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ὑπάρχω (*hyparcho*) is built from the roots meaning 'under' and 'begin.' It encompasses meanings such as 'to begin,' 'to exist,' and 'to belong to.' In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, including Acts 19:40 and 28:18, where it conveys existence or possession. Notably, the lexicons do not present significant disagreement regarding its meanings.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὑπάρχω

[in LXX for הָיָה, יֵשׁ, לוּן, etc.; τ. ὑπάρχοντα for מִקְנֶה, רְכוּשׁ, etc. ;]

to begin, make a beginning (Hom., Hdt., al.).

to be in existence, be ready, be at hand (Hdt., Thuc., al.): Ac 19:40 27:12, 21; seq. ἐν, Ac 28:18.

to be, prop, expressing continuance of an antecedent state or condition (cf. Gifford, Incarnation, 11 ff.; MM, xxv): c. nom. pred., Lk 8:41 9:48, Ac 4:34 7:55 8:16 16:3 19:36 21:20, I Co 7:26 12:22, Ja 2:15, II Pe 3:11; ptcp. c. pred., Lk…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὑπάρχω: impf. ὑπῆρχον; 1. prop. to begin below, to make a beginning; univ. to begin; (Hom., Aeschyl., Hat., sqq-). 2. to come forth, hence to be there, be ready, be at hand, (Aeschyl., Hdt., Pind., sqq.): univ. and simply, Acts xix. 40 [cf. B. § 151, 29 note]; xxvii. 12, 21; ἔν rem, to be found in one, Acts xxviii. 18; with a dat. of the pers. ὑπάρχει μοί τι, something is mine, I have something: Acts iii. 6; iv. 37; xxviii. 7; 2 Pet. i. 8 (where Lehm. παρόντα; Sir. xx. 16; Prov. xvii. 17; Job ii. 4, ete.) ; τὰ ὑπάρχοντά τινι, one’s substance, one’s property, Lk. viii. 3; xii. 15 Ltxt. T Tr WH; Acts iv. 32, (Gen. xxxi. 18; Tob. iv. 8; Dio C. 38,40); also τὰ ὑπ. τινος, Mt. xix. 21; xxiv.47; xxv. 14; Lk. xi. 21; xii. 15 RG Lmrg., 33, 44 [here L mrg. Tr mrg. the dat.]; xiv. 33; xvi. 1; xix. 8; 1 Co. xiii. 3; Heb. x. 34, (often in Sept. for 1391, Wi39, 0°DD3; Sir. xli.1; Tob. i. 20, ete.; τὰ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὑπάρχω. The idea of falling back upon a ‘‘basis,’’ and hence of continuity with a previous state, which originally belonged this verb (cf. Hort ad Jas 215), seems gradually to have faded in later Greek, as the following exx. show—P Petr III. 64(4.)!* (iii/B.c.) τοῦτο (sc. τὸ ὀψώνιον) ὑπάρξει 7 τιμὴ τῶν εὑρεθέντων] παρὰ Τασύθει, ‘this will be made up by the price of the articles discovered in the possession of Tasuthis” (Edd.), P Hib I. γ218 (B.c. 241) τὴμ μὲν σφραγῖδα ὡμολόγουν ὑπάρχειν ἐν τῶι ἀδύτωι, ‘confessed that the seal was in the sanctuary”’ (Edd.), P Oxy IX. 11Sgl® (c. A.D. 117) περὶ γραφῆς τῶν τοῖς [᾿1Ι]ουδαίοις ὑπαρξάντων, ‘about ἃ list of property which belonged to the Jews”.(Ed.), 7. VI. 93317 (late ii/a.D.) πάντα αὐτῇ ὑπῆρκται, “everything was provided for her” (Edd.), 2d. 90518 (a.p. [2 ὑπείκω 170) (= Selections, p. 87) a marriage contract, where the giver of the bride has…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὑπάρχω (huparchō) — be already.

ὑπάρχω,

future

__A -ξω[Refs 5th c.BC+]aorist ὑπῆρξα (see. below [Refs]:—passive, future ὑπαρχθήσομαι [Refs 3rd c.AD+]perfect ὕπηργμαι, Ionic dialect -αργμαι[Refs 5th c.BC+]:—begin, take the initiative:—Constr.:

__A.1 absolutely, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὁ ὑπάρξας the beginner (in a quarrel), [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—middle, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

__A.2 with genitive, take the initiative in, begin, ἀδίκων ἔργων, ἀδικίης, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

__A.3 with participle, take the initiative in doing, ἐμὲ ὑπῆρξαν ἄδικα ποιεῦντες [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὑπάρχει εὖ (or κακῶς) ποιῶν τινα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοῖς αὐτοῖς ἀμύνεσθαι οἷσπερ καὶ οἱ Λκεδαιμόνιοι ὑπῆρξαν retaliating by the means which the L. had used first, [Refs 5th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὑπάρχω

huparcho

from 5259 and 756; to begin under (quietly), i.e. come into existence

(be present or at hand); expletively, to exist (as copula or

subordinate to an adjective, participle, adverb or preposition, or as

an auxiliary to a principal (verb):--after, behave, live.

see GREEK for 5259

see GREEK for 756

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὑπάρχω

v.

I am, exist, am in possession

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὑπάρχω hyparchō 60x

to begin; to come into existence; to exist; to be, subsist, Acts 19:40; 28:18; to be in possession, to belong, Acts 3:6; 4:37; goods, possessions, property, Mt. 19:21; Lk. 8:3; to be, Lk. 7:25; 8:41

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὑπάρχω fut. ξω aor1 ὑπῆρξα Pass., perf. ὕπηργμαι ionic -αργμαι to begin, make a beginning, absol., Od., Eur., etc.

c. gen. to make a beginning of, ἀδικίης Hdt.; πολλῶν κακῶν Eur., etc.

c. part to begin doing, ὑπῆρξαν ἄδικα ποιεῦντες Hdt.; ὑπάρχει εὖ ποιῶν τινα Xen.

c. acc., ὑπ. εὐεργεσίας εἴς τινα or τινι to begin [doing] kindnesses to one, Dem., Aeschin.:—Pass. to be begun, τὰ ἔκ τινος ὑπαργμένα (ionic for ὑπηργ-) Hdt.:—impers., ὑπῆρκτο αὐτοῦ a beginning of it had been made, Thuc.

to begin to be, come into being, arise, spring up, Aesch., etc.

to be in existence, to be there, to be ready, Hdt., attic;—c. gen., ὑπάρχει τῶνδε there is store of these things, Aesch.:—oft. in part., ἡ ὑπάρχουσα οὐσία the existing property…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PAP-GSM — Verb · present · active · participle · genitive · singular · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PAP-GSM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
38%being
being38% · 23×possessions23% · 14×were5% · 3×be5% · 3×was3% · 2×existing3% · 2×other renderings13% · 8×other renderings10% · 6×

61 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 20 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
linking verb58%verb38%object3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 60 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
πᾶςall, the whole, ἐκσύ
σύ
πᾶςall, the whole, ἐνγάρfor
αὐτός
ὀφθαλμόςthe eyeμήτηρa motherπατήρfather, Father,
οὖνtherefore, then
προφήτηςa prophet, poetγένοςoffspring, famil
ἸουδαῖοςJewish
πόλιςa cityσύ
ὑπάρχωbeing60×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
δίδωμιI offer, giveπίπτωI fall, fall undἐκμυκτηρίζωI deride, scoff
αὐτός
καθίστημιI set, establishλέγωI say, speakἀγρόςa field, the cou
Article the
θεόςGod, a godγυνήa woman, wife, mπατρικόςpaternal, ancest
ἐν
Article theβάσανοςtorture, tormentἐγώ
σύ
καίand, even, also,μετάἐν

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὑπάρχω · 60× in the New Testament
Acts Luke 1 Corinthians 2 Peter Matthew 2 Corinthians Galatians Philippians Hebrews James Romans
Across the New Testament11 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 47 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 150c. AD 40

ἀκράτου γὰρ ἔτι τῆς λογικῆς φύσεως ὑπαρχούσης ἐν ψυχῇ καὶ μηδενὸς ἀρρωστήματος ἢ νοσήματος ἢ πάθους παρεισεληλυθότος, τὰς φαντασίας τῶν σωμάτων καὶ πραγμάτων ἀκραιφνεστάτας λαμβάνων εὐθυβόλους ἐποιεῖτο τὰς κλήσεις, εὖ μάλα στοχαζόμενος τῶν…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.259c. AD 75–95

Λιμοῦ δὲ τὴν γῆν καταλαβόντος Ἴσακος, δόξαν αὐτῷ χωρεῖν εἰς Αἴγυπτον τῆς χώρας ἀγαθῆς ὑπαρχούσης, ἐπὶ Γεράρων ἀπῄει τοῦ θεοῦ κελεύσαντος.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 5.10c. AD 100

εἰ γὰρ μὴ ἦλθεν ἐν σαρκί, οὐδ̓ ἄν πως οἱ ἄνθρωποι ἐσώθησαν βλέποντες αὐτόν, ὅτε τὸν μέλλοντα μὴ εἶναι ἥλιον, ἔργου τῶν χειρῶν αὐτοῦ ὑπάρχοντα, ἐμβλέποντες οὐκ ἰσχύουσιν εἰς τὰς ἀκτῖνας αὐτοῦ ἀντοφθαλμῆσαι:

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 2nd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος αὐτοῖς καὶ τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς παστοφορίου ὠκοδομημένου καὶ δεδοκωμένου καὶ τεθυρωμένου ἐν τῷ ἀπὸ νότου

BGU 3 1000Pathyris99 BC

Πέρσης τῆς ἐπιγονῆς ὡς ἐτῶν ξ μέσος μελίχρως τετανὸς ἀναφάλακρος μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ἀπὸ τῆς ὑπαρχούσης αὐτῷ καὶ τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς γῆς ἠπείρου σιτοφόρου ἀδιαιρέτου ἐν τῷ ἀπὸ βορρᾶ πεδίωι Παθύρεως

P.Adl. 19Pathyris99 BC

ἡμέρας ἑκάστης· ἡ δὲ πρᾶξις ἔστω Ὥρωι ἔκ τε αὐτοῦ Γαλάτου καὶ ἐκ τῶν ὑπαρχόντων αὐτῷ πάντων πράσσοντι καθάπερ ἐκ δίκης. Ἑρμίας ὁ παρὰ Πανίσκου κεχρημάτικα.

Unsuitable now the harbor being to winter in the majority reached a decision to set sail from there, if somehow they would be able having arrived at Phoenix to winter [there] — a harbor <the> of Crete looking toward [the] southwest and toward [the] northwest.
πρὸςpros to G4314 Preposition
700× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A preposition showing direction or relationship, like towards or with something, as seen in Mark 5:11 and John 18:16. This means indicating movement or direction. It's about showing proximity or connection.
Tyndale gloss
to/with
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

πρός is a preposition that indicates direction, proximity, or relation. It can be used with the genitive to denote motion from a place, with the dative for local proximity, and with the accusative to express motion towards a place or object. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, such as Acts 27:34 for benefit and Mark 5:11 for proximity.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

πρός,

prep. c. gen., dat., acc.

C. gen., of motion from a place, from the side of, hence metaph., in the interests of, Ac 27:34 (cf. Page, in l.).

C. dat., of local proximity, hard by, near, at: Mk 5:11, Lk 19:37, Jo 18:16 20:11, 12, Re 1:13.

C. acc., of motion or direction towards a place or object, to, towards.

Of place,

after verbs of motion or of speaking and other words with the idea of direction: ἔρχομαι, ἀναβαίνω, πορεύομαι, λέγω, ἐπιστολή, etc., Mt 3:14, Mk 6:51, Lk 11:5, Jo 2:3,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

πρός, a preposition, i.q. Epic mpori, from πρό and the adverbial suffix τι, (cf. the German vor . . . hin [Curtius § 381]); it is joined I. with the AccusaTIvE, to, towards, Lat. ad, denoting direction towards athing, or position and state looking towards a thing (W. § 49h. p. 404 (378)): it is used 1. of the goal or limit towards which a movement is directed: πρός twa or τι, a. prop. after verbs of going, departing, running, coming, ete.: ἄγω, Jn. xi. 15; ἀναβαίνω, Mk. vi. 51; Jn. xx. 17; Acts xv. 2; ἀνακάμπτω, Mt. ii. 12; Acts xvili. 21; ἀνέρχομαι, Gal. i. 17 [1]. Tr mrg. arépy.]; ἀπέρχομαι, Mt. » xiv. 25 [Rec.]; Mk. iii. 13, etc.; πρὸς ἑαυτόν, to his house, Lk. xxiv. 12 [T om. L Trbr. WH reject the ys.; Tr reads mp. αὐτόν ; some connect the phrase w. θαυμάζων (see 2 Ὁ. below) ]; Jn. xx. 10 [Ὁ Tr αὐτούς, WH air. (cf. s. v. αὑτοῦ sub fin.)]; γίνεσθαι πρός τινα, to come to one, 1 Co.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

πρός reference to place PSI IV. 31178 (iv/A.D.?) πρ]ὸς τὴν Aavitk.ay τῆς κοίλης Dupials. Headlam (on Herodas VII. 123) holds that τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν in Mk 2? ‘‘is surely idiomatic (not vulgar as Moulton thinks) ‘spots which commanded the door’”: cf. Mt 310, Lk 35. For πρός, ‘‘with,” as in Jn ΤΡ, Heb 41%, cf. Epict. iv. 9. 13 πρὸς ὃν οὐδείς ἐστί σου πιθανώτερος (see Sharp Ξε, p. 92). And for the possibility that the difficult πρός in Mk 63, οἷ", 14%, Jn 1}, 1 Jn 1?, is to be explained as an Aramaism, see Rendel Harris Prologue to S. John’s Gospel p. 8f., and Burney Avamaic Origin of the Fourth Gospel p. 28 f. (6) of time = ‘‘for’’ (a time) and no longer—BGU I. 1131? (A.D. 143) βουλόμενος παρεπιδημεῖν πρὸς καιρόν (cf. Lk 818), P Oxy I. 6714 (A.D. 338) πρὸς ὀλίγον εἰσχύει, ‘‘withstands but for a short time” (cf. Jas 4), and P Flor III. 282° (A.D. 520) πρὸς ὅλον χρόνον. (c) of mental…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

πρός (pros) — to/with.

πρός,

preposition, expressing direction,

__A on the side of, in the direction of, hence with genitive, dative, and accusative, from, at, to: Epic dialect also προτί and ποτί, in [Refs 8th c.BC+] usually with accusative, more rarely with dative, and each only once with genitive, [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—dialectal forms: Doric dialectποτί (which see) and ποί, but Cretan dialect πορτί [Refs], Argive προτ(ί) [Refs 7th c.BC+] πός [Refs 4th c.BC+]., also sometimes in Asia Minor in compounds, see at {ποσάγω},{ποσφέρω}; Aeolic dialect πρός [Refs 7th c.BC+]; πρές [Refs 6th c.AD+]; Pamphylian περτ (ί) [Refs] (With προτί, πρός cf. Sanskrit práti 'towards, near to, against, back, etc.', Slavonic protiv[ucaron], Lett. pret 'against', Latin pretium: ποτί (which see) and πός are not cognate) [Refs 4th c.BC+] refers to that from which something…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

πρός

pros

a strengthened form of 4253; a preposition of direction; forward to,

i.e. toward (with the genitive case, the side of, i.e. pertaining to;

with the dative case, by the side of, i.e. near to; usually with the

accusative case, the place, time, occasion, or respect, which is the

destination of the relation, i.e. whither or for which it is

predicated):--about, according to , against, among, at, because of,

before, between, (where-)by, for, X at thy house, in, for intent, nigh

unto, of, which pertain to, that, to (the end that), X together, to

(you) -ward, unto, with(-in). In the comparative case, it denotes

essentially the same applications, namely, motion towards, accession

to, or nearness at.

see GREEK for 4253

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

πρός

Prep.

to, towards, with

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

πρός pros 700x

from; met. for the benefit of, Acts 27:34; with a dative, near, by, at, by the side of, in the vicinity of, Mk. 5:11; Lk. 19:37; with an accusative, used of the place to which anything tends, to, unto, towards, Mt. 2:12; 3:5, 13; at, close upon, Mt. 3:10; Mk. 5:22; near to, in the vicinity of, Mk. 6:45; after verbs of speaking, praying, answering to a charge, etc., to, Mt. 3:15; 27:14; of place where, with, in, among, by, at, etc., Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

πρός prep. with gen., implying motion from a place; with dat., abiding at a place; with acc., motion to a place

WITH GEN.,

of Place, from, from forth, Hom., Soph.

on the side or quarter of, νήσοισι πρὸς Ἤλιδος islands looking (as it were) from Elis, i. e. towards Elis, Od.; πρὸς τοῦ Ἑλλησπόντου ἵδρυται μᾶλλον ἢ τοῦ Στρύμονος lies more towards (i. e. nearer) the Hellespont than the Strymon, Hdt.; ἐστρατοπεδεύοντο πρὸς Ὀλύνθου Thuc., etc.:—often with words denoting the points of the compass, δύω θύραι εἰσίν, αἱ μὲν πρὸς βορέαο, αἱ δ᾽ αὖ πρὸς νότου one looking north wards, the other south wards, Od.; so, οἰκέουσι πρὸς νότου ἀνέμου Hdt., etc.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
69%to
to69% · 506×with7% · 48×for6% · 42×toward4% · 30×against3% · 21×at3% · 20×unto2% · 18×other renderings5% · 37×other renderings1% · 10×

732 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 32 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial93%predicate5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 700 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ἔρχομαιI come, go
καίand, even, also,Article theνύξthe night, night
λέγωI say, speak
καίand, even, also,δέbut, on the otheἸησοῦςJesus
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakArticle theπαραγίνομαιI appear, come,
αὐτός
ἄγωI leadφέρωI carry, bear, bμαθητήςa learner, disci
ἐγώ
ὑπέρσῶμαbody, fleshυἱόςa son, descenden
πρόςto700×
what comes after →
Article the
πατήρfather, Father, θεόςGod, a godμαθητήςa learner, disci
αὐτός
Article theλέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,
σύ
καίand, even, also,ἐνἔρχομαιI come, go
ἐγώ
καίand, even, also,Article theοὐNeg
ἀλλήλων
τίςIrgλέγωI say, speakμήNeg

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπρός · 700× in the New Testament
Luke Acts John Mark Matthew 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians Hebrews Romans Ephesians 1 Thessalonians Galatians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 3c. AD 40

ἡ δ’ ἀρχή, καθάπερ ἔφην, ἐστὶ θαυμασιωτάτη κοσμοποιίαν περιέχουσα, ὡς καὶ τοῦ κόσμου τῷ νόμῳ καὶ τοῦ νόμου τῷ κόσμῳ συνᾴδοντος καὶ τοῦ νομίμου ἀνδρὸς εὐθὺς ὄντος κοσμοπολίτου πρὸς τὸ βούλημα τῆς φύσεως τὰς πράξεις ἀπευθύνοντος, καθ’ ἣν καὶ ὁ σύμπας…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.4c. AD 75–95

τὸν μὲν γὰρ πρὸς τοὺς Ῥωμαίους πόλεμον ἡμῖν τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις γενόμενον καὶ τὰς ἐν αὐτῷ πράξεις καὶ τὸ τέλος οἷον ἀπέβη πείρᾳ μαθὼν ἐβιάσθην ἐκδιηγήσασθαι διὰ τοὺς ἐν τῷ γράφειν λυμαινομένους τὴν ἀλήθειαν,

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 2.3c. AD 100

τούτων οὖν μενόντων τὰ πρὸς κύριον ἁγνῶς, συνευφραίνονται αὐτοῖς σοφία, σύνεσις, ἐπιστήμη, γνῶσις.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Grenf. 1 28Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)109 BC

r … πυρὸν νέον καθαρὸν ἄδολον μέτρωι ὧι καὶ παρείληφεν καὶ ἀποκαθεστάμενον εἰς οἶκον πρὸς αὐτὸν ἰδίοις ἀνηλώμασιν. ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀποδῶι ἐν τῶι ὡρισμένωι χρόνωι ἢ μὴ ποιῆ

P.Amh. 2 48Pathyris107 BC

παρεχέτω τὸν οἶνον μόνιμον ἕως Ἁθὺρ λ τοῦ δεκάτου ἔτους, καὶ ἀποκαταστησάτω εἰς οἶκον πρὸς αὐτὴν τοῖς ἰδίοις. ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀποδῷ ἐν τῷ ὡρισμένῳ χρόνῳ ἀποτεισάτω ἑκάστου κεραμίου

P.Grenf. 1 30Pathyris104 BC

πᾶσι χαίρειν καὶ ἐρρωμένοις διὰ παντὸς εὐημερεῖν. ὑγιαίνομεν δὲ καὶ αὐτοί. μεταλαβόντες τοὺς συντετελεσμένους πρὸς τοὺς ἀσεβεῖς Ἑρμωνθίτας ἀγῶνας μεγάλως ἐχάρημεν. ἐπεὶ οὖν προκεχειρίκαμεν προστάτην τοῦ μεγίστου θεοῦ Νεχθφαραῦτος

Unsuitable now the harbor being to winter in the majority reached a decision to set sail from there, if somehow they would be able having arrived at Phoenix to winter [there] — a harbor <the> of Crete looking toward [the] southwest and toward [the] northwest.
παραχειμασίανparacheimasia winter in G3915 Noun · accusative · singular · feminine
1× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Wintering refers to staying in a place over the winter season. In Acts 27:12, the ship Paul was on was wintering in a harbor to avoid the stormy weather.
Amplified meaning
to stay in a place over the cold or rainy season
Tyndale gloss
wintering
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

παραχειμασία refers to the act of wintering or passing the winter in a specific place. It is derived from the verb παραχειμάζω. The term appears in Acts 27:12, where it describes a wintering location. Various lexicons confirm this meaning, with no significant disagreements noted.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

*† παρα-χειμασία, -ας, ἡ

(< παρα-χειμάζω),

a wintering: Ac 27:12 (Polyb., al.).†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

παραχειμασία, -as, 7, (παραχειμάζω), a passing the winter, wintering: Acts xxvii. 12. (Polyb. 3, 34, 6; [8, 35, 1]; Diod. 19, 68.)

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

παραχειμασία, “ἐᾷ wintering ” (Ac 2712): cf. Sy// 342 (= 8.762)15 (a.p. 48) κατὰ τὴν Γαΐου) Αντωνίου παραχειμασίαν.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

παραχειμασία (paracheimasia) — wintering.

παραχειμ-ᾰσία, ἡ,

wintering in a place, [NT+2nd c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

παραχειμασία

paracheimasia

from 3914; a wintering over:--winter in.

see GREEK for 3914

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

παραχειμασία, ας, ἡ

n.f.

wintering

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

παραχειμασία paracheimasia 1x

a wintering in a place, Acts 27:12*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

παραχειμασία from παραχειμάζω παραχειμα^σία, ἡ, a wintering in a place, Polyb.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-ASF — Noun · accusative · singular · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

A principal thing to notice about this preposition, which in the King James Version represents about 16 Hebrew and as many Greek words and prepositions, is that, in hundreds of cases (especially in the Old Testament, but frequently also in the New Testament) in the Revised Version (British and American) the rendering is changed to more exact forms ("to," "unto," "by," "upon," "at," "with," "among," "for," "throughout," etc.; compare e.g. Ge 6:16; 13:8; 17:7,9,12; 18:1; Ex 8:17; Le 1:9, etc.); while, nearly as often, "in" is substituted for divergent forms of the King James Version (e.g. Ge 2:14; 17:11; 31:54; 40:7; 49:17; Ex…

Across the New Testament1 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus
JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 14.195c. AD 75–95

παραχειμασίαν δὲ ἢ χρήματα πράσσεσθαι οὐ δοκιμάζω.

Unsuitable now the harbor being to winter in the majority reached a decision to set sail from there, if somehow they would be able having arrived at Phoenix to winter [there] — a harbor <the> of Crete looking toward [the] southwest and toward [the] northwest.
οἱho the G3588 Article · nominative · plural · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-NPM — Article · nominative · plural · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-NPM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

Unsuitable now the harbor being to winter in the majority reached a decision to set sail from there, if somehow they would be able having arrived at Phoenix to winter [there] — a harbor <the> of Crete looking toward [the] southwest and toward [the] northwest.
πλείονεςpolus majority G4119 Adjective · nominative · plural · masculine
386× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
In plain English
Tyndale gloss
much
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

πλέον, v.s. πολύς.

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

πολύς, πολλή (fr. an older form πολλός, found in Hom., Hes., Pind.), πολύ; [(cf. Curtius § 375)]; Sept. chiefly for 39; much; used a. of multitude, number, etc., many, numerous, great: ἀριθμός, Acts xi. 21; λαός, Acts xviii. 10; ὄχλος, Mk. v. 24; vi. 34; [viii.1 LT Tr WH]; Lk. vii. 11; viii. 4; Jn. vi. 2,5; Rev. vii. 9; xix. 6, etc.; πλῆθος, Mk. iii. 7sq.; Lk. v. 6; Acts xiv. 1, ete.; 1. q. abundant, plenteous [A. V. often much], καρπός, Jn. xii. 24; xv. 5,8; θερισμός, (the harvest to be gathered), Mt. ix. 37; Lk. x. 2; γῆ, Mt. xiii. 5; Mk. iv. 5; χόρτος, Jn. vi. 10; οἶνος, 1 Tim. iii. 8; plur. πολλοὶ τελῶναι, Mt. ix. 10; Mk. ii. 15; πολλοὶ προφῆται, Mt. xiii. 17; Lk. x. 24; σοφοί, 1 Co. i. 26; πατέρες, 1 Co. iv. 15; δυνάμεις, Mt. vii. 22; xiii. 58, ete.; ὄχλοι, Mt. iv. 25; viii. 1; xii. 15 [but here L TWH om. Trbr. ὄχ.7; Lk. v. 15, ete.; δαιμόνια, Mk.i. 34; and in many otherexx.; with…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

πολύς, “much,” plur. ‘‘many’’: P Petr I. 2905 (iii/B.c.) χάρις τοῖς θεοῖς πολλὴ εἰ ὑγιαίνεις, ‘‘much thanks to the gods if you are well,” P Ryl II. 2435 (ii/A.D.) τοῦτο οὐ μόνον ἡμεῖν yevapevov ἀλλὰ Kal πολλοῖς, ‘this has happened not to us only but to many ” (Edd.), and 16. 238* (A.p. 262) διὰ πολλὰς χρείας, “for various needs’ (Edd.). The word is very conimon in epistolary greetings (πολλὰ χαίρειν : exx. from B.C. 118 to ili/iv A.D. in Exler Eprstolography p. 27 f.) and in rhetorical prefaces (Sirach proem.), and consequently, as Cadbury suggests (in Jackson and Lake Beginnings of Christianity Part I. Vol. ii. p. 492 f.), πολλοί must not be pressed to mean “ἡ Ac 243, 10, For the adverbial πολλά, which ‘‘ lies between πολύ and πολλάκις : it is ‘much’ with the idea of plurality and repetition introduced’’ (Hort ad Jas 32), cf. P Heid 622 (iv/a.p.) (= Selections, p. 127) πολλὰ…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

πλείων, πλεῖον (pleiōn, pleion) — greater.

πλείων,

πλέων, ὁ, ἡ, neuter πλεῖον, πλέον, πλεῖν, comparative of πολύς (on the forms see entry near the end), more, of number, size, extent, etc., οἱ δὲ μάχονται παυρότεροι πλεόνεσσι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐς πλείονας οἰκεῖν govern for the interest of the majority, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πλέον᾽ ἔλπομαι λόγον Ὀδυσσέος ἢ πάθαν greater than.., [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸν πλείω λόγον all further speech, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πλείω τὸν πλοῦν.. ποιησάμενοι having made the voyage longer, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ π. βίος a longer life, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of Time, longer, π. χρόνος [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

πολύς

pleion

pleion pli'-on, or

pleon pleh'-on

comparative of 4183; more in quantity, number, or quality; also (in

plural) the major portion:--X above, + exceed, more excellent,

further, (very) great(-er), long(-er), (very) many, greater (more)

part, + yet but.

see GREEK for 4183

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

πλείων, εῖον

Adj

more, greater

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

πολύς polys 416x

great in magnitude or quantity, much, large, Mt. 13:5; Jn. 3:23; 15:8; pl. many, Mt. 3:7; in time, long, Mt. 25:19; Mk. 6:35; Jn. 5:6; οἱ πολλοί, the many, the mass, Rom. 5:15; 12:5; 1 Cor. 10:33; τὸ πολύ, much, 2 Cor. 8:15; πολύ, as an adv., much, greatly, Mk. 12:27; Lk. 7:47; of…

Read the full entry →
Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

πλείων πλείων, πλέων, ονος, ὁ, ἡ, comp. of πολύς more, larger, both of number and size, Hom., etc.; τὸν πλείω λόγον all further speech, Soph.; πλείω τὸν πλοῦν the greater part of . . , Thuc.:—of Time, longer, πλείων χρόνος Hdt.; πλέων νύξ the greater part of night, Il.

with the Art., οἱ πλέονες the greater number, like οἱ πολλοί, the mass or crowd, Hom.; οἱ πλεῦνες Hdt., etc.; c. gen., τὰς πλεῦνας τῶν γυκαικῶν id. Hdt.:— the many, the people, opp. to the chief men, Thuc., etc.:— τὸ πλεῖον πολέμοιο the greater part of war, Hom.

pecul. usages of neut.:

as a Noun, more, πλεῦν ἔτι τούτου Hdt.; τὸ δὲ πλέον nay, what is more, Eur., Thuc.:— πλέον or τὸ πλέον τινός a higher degree of a thing, Soph.; τὸ πλ. τοῦ χρόνου Thuc.:— πλέον ἔχειν to…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-NPM-C — Adjective · nominative · plural · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-NPM-C Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine Degree: Comparative

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
33%more
more33% · 15×greater16% · 7×many11% · 5×most7% · 3×further4% · 2×longer4% · 2×majority4% · 2×more than2% · 1×other renderings18% · 8×

45 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 16 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial35%object29%subject26%predicate11%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 55 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 29 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Unsuitable now the harbor being to winter in the majority reached a decision to set sail from there, if somehow they would be able having arrived at Phoenix to winter [there] — a harbor <the> of Crete looking toward [the] southwest and toward [the] northwest.
ἔθεντοtithēmi reached G5087 Verb · second aorist · middle · indicative · third person · plural
99× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To place means to put or set something down, like laying a foundation or setting a table. Jesus talked about laying a foundation on rock in Luke 6:48.
Tyndale gloss
to place
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

τίθημι (tithēmi) means to place, lay, or set, covering a wide range of applications both literally and figuratively. It can refer to actions like laying down one's life or placing something in a specific location. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts such as laying down garments (John 13:4) and establishing laws (Matthew 22:44). The lexicons provide various nuances, but there is no significant disagreement among them.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

τίθημι,

[in LXX for שִׁית ,נתן ,שׂוּם, etc. ;]

causative of κεῖμαι,

to place, lay, set: Lk 6:48, Ro 9:33, al.; of laying the dead to rest, Mk 15:47, Lk 23:55, Jo 11:34, Ac 7:16, al.; seq. ἐπί, c. gen., Lk 8:16, Jo 19:19, al.; id. c. acc., Mk 4:21, II Co 3:13, al.; ὑπό, Mt 5:15, al.; παρά, Ac 4:35, 37. Mid., to have put or placed, to…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

τίθημι, 3 pers. plur. τιθέασιν (Mt. v.15; [W.§ 14, 1a.; B. 44 (38)]); impf. (fr. τιθέω) 3 pers. sing. ἐτίθει (2 Co. iii. 13), 3 pers. plur. ἐτίθουν (Mk. vi. 56 [RG L]; Acts iii. 2; iv. 35) [and (T Tr WH in Mk. ]. c.) ἐτίθεσαν, cf. B. 45 (39); WH. App. p. 167]; fut. θήσω; 1 aor. ἔθηκα; 2 aor. (ἔθην) subj. θῶ, [impv. 2 pers. plur. θέτε, Lk. xxi. 14 LT Tr WH (for RG 2 aor. mid. impv. 6é06e) |, inf. θεῖναι, ptep. cis; pf. τέθεικα; Pass., pres. 3 pers. sing. τίθεται (Mk. xv. 47 RG); pf. 3 pers. sing. τέθειται (Mk. xv. 47 LT Tr WH); 1 aor. ἐτέθην ; 2 aor. mid. ἐθέμην (2 pers. sing. ἔθου. Acts v. 4); (see ἐπιτίθημι); fr. Hom. down; Sept. mostly for pw and Dw, 102, mv and mwa, M3, ete. ; 1. to set, put, place, i.e. causative of κεῖσθαι; hence a. to place or lay: τί, as θεμέλιον, [Lk. vi. 48]; xiv. 29; 1 Co. iii. 10 sq. (θεμείλια, Hom. II. 12, 29); λίθον, Ro. ix. 33; 1 Pet. ii. 6; ri, opp. to…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

τίθημι, (1) ‘‘place,” “set”: cf. P Oxy IV. 7425 (B.c. 2) ἀπόστειAdv plo]e πόσας δέσμας παρείληφες Kal θ[ὲ]ς αὐτὰς εἰς τόπον ἀσφαλῶς, ‘send me word how many bundles you have received, and put them in a safe place” (Edd.), P Fay 119"? (c, A.D. 100) τ]ὴν διαγραφὴν τοῦ χόρτου ποῦ τέθικας ; ‘where did you put the notice of payment for the hay?” P Oxy NIV. 16748 (iii/A.b.) θὲς τὴν ὀπτὴν πλίνθον π[α]ρὰ τὴν πλάτην, “put the baked bricks alongside the wall (?)” (Edd.). (2) ‘*put down,” “Jay down”: cf. P Cairo Zen IT. 59218" (B.C. 254) ὑπόμνημα τῶ[ν] ἱερέων τοῦ ἱεροῦ τῶν θέντων τὰ μέρη, ‘memorandum of the priests of the temple who have paid their portions,” and P Fay 109§ (early i/a.p.) ἐάν σε B<€>y τὸ εἱμάτιόν σου θεῖναι ἐνέχυρον, ‘even if you have to pawn your cloak” (Edd.). See also Herodas V. 62 ἔθηκας, ‘“‘you put off’ (cf. Headlam’s note with its reference to Lk 197%). (3) ‘‘make,” ‘‘appoint…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

τίθημι (tithēmi) — to place.

τίθημι [τῐ],

2nd pers. singular τιθεῖς [Refs 5th c.BC+] codices Lp (-θείς P, τίθης l), Alc. [Refs 5th c.BC+] (προσ-); ἐν-τιθεῖς (variant{-εὶς}) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; but τίθης is found in [Refs 5th c.BC+] (προσ-), etc., and is taught by [Refs 4th c.AD+]; Epic dialect τίθησθα [Refs 8th c.BC+], and so in Aeolic dialect, [Refs 7th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular τίθησι [Refs 8th c.BC+], and Attic dialect; Doric dialect τίθητι [Refs 4th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural τιθέασι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Epic dialect and Ionic dialect τιθεῖσι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Aeolic dialect τίθεισι (προ-) [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; Doric dialect τίθεντι [Refs]; Ionic dialect 3rd.pers. singular τιθεῖ [Refs 8th c.BC+]: imperfect ἐτίθην [Refs 5th c.BC+] (ἐν-), etc.; ἐτίθει [Refs 8th c.BC+] (προσ-), etc., Epic dialect τίθει [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Epic dialect 3rd.pers. plural τίθεσαν [NT+8th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

τίθημι

tithemi

theo theh'-o (which is used only as alternate in

certain tenses)

to place (in the widest application, literally and figuratively;

properly, in a passive or horizontal posture, and thus different from

2476, which properly denotes an upright and active position, while

2749 is properly reflexive and utterly prostrate):--+ advise,

appoint, bow, commit, conceive, give,

X kneel down, lay (aside, down, up), make, ordain, purpose,

put, set (forth), settle, sink down.

see GREEK for 2476

see GREEK for 2749

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

τίθημι

v.

I put, place

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

τίθημι tithēmi 100x

by-form of τιθέω, to place, set, lay, Mt. 5:15; Mk. 6:56; Lk. 6:48; to produce at table, Jn. 2:10; to deposit, lay, Mt. 27:60; Lk. 23:53; Acts 3:2; to lay down, Lk. 19:21, 22; Jn. 10:11, 15, 17, 18; 1 Jn. 3:16; to lay aside, put off, Jn. 13:4; to allocate, assign, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

τίθημι from Root ΘΕ in local sense, to set, put, place, Hom., etc.:—in attic, πόδα τ. to plant the foot, i. e. walk, run, Aesch.; τετράποδος βάσιν θηρὸς τίθεσθαι, i. e. to go on all fours, Eur.: θεῖναί τινί τι ἐν χερσίν to put it in his hands, Il.; ἐς χεῖρά τινος into his hand, Soph.

θέσθαι τὴν ψῆφον to lay one's voting-pebble on the altar, put it into the urn, Aesch.; so, τίθεσθαι τὴν γνώμην to give one's opinion, Hdt.; and τίθεσθαι absol. to vote, Soph.

θεῖναί τινί τι ἐν φρεσί, ἐν στήθεσσι to put or plant it in his heart, Hom.; ἐν στήθεσσι τιθεῖ νόον Il., etc.: Mid., θέσθαι θυμὸν ἐν στήθεσσι to lay up wrath in one's heart, id. Il.; θέσθαι τινὶ κότον to harbour enmity against him, id.…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-2AMI-3P — Verb · second aorist · middle · indicative · third person · plural
second aorist middle indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-2AMI-3P Part of Speech: Verb Tense: second Aorist Voice: Middle Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Plural

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
7%put
put7% · 7×i may place5% · 5×laid4% · 4×lay down4% · 4×he laid3% · 3×placed3% · 3×having bowed3% · 3×appointed3% · 3×other renderings68% · 68×

100 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 69 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb98%linking verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 99 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςλύχνοςa lampεἰσφέρωI lead into, bri
ὅς
εἰςβαστάζωI carry, carry aἀνήρa male human bei
ἐγώ
ψυχήthe soul, life, ὅτιthat, since, becἀλλάbut, except
ἄνDisj
ἕωςuntil, as far as
ποῦIrg
οἶδαI know, rememberλέγωI say, speakἐγώ
τίθημιreached99×
what comes after →
Article the
ἐχθρόςhated, hostile, γόνυa kneeπνεῦμαwind, breath, sp
αὐτός
ἐνὑπόθεμέλιοςbelonging to the
ἐν
Article theΣιώνPropὑπερῷονan upper room
εἰς
τήρησιςa prison, observφυλακήa watching, guarμνημεῖονa tomb, sepulche
σύ
εἰςἵναin order that, sκατέναντιopposite, in fro

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceτίθημι · 99× in the New Testament
Acts John Luke Mark 1 Corinthians Matthew Hebrews Revelation Romans 1 John 1 Peter 1 Timothy
Across the New Testament16 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 269 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 33c. AD 40

ἵν’ οὖν μὴ αἰεὶ συμφερόμεναι στασιάζωσι καὶ πόλεμος ἀντ’ εἰρήνης ἐπικρατῇ τὴν ἀκοσμίαν ἐν κόσμῳ τιθείς, οὐ μόνον ἐχώρισε φῶς καὶ σκότος, ἀλλὰ καὶ ὅρους ἐν μέσοις ἔθετο διαστήμασιν, οἷς ἀνεῖρξε τῶν ἄκρων ἑκάτερον·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.28c. AD 75–95

καὶ γενομένου τούτου κατανοήσας τὴν ὅλην ὕλην διεχώρισε τό τε φῶς καὶ τὸ σκότος καὶ τῷ μὲν ὄνομα ἔθετο νύκτα, τὸ δὲ ἡμέραν ἐκάλεσεν ἑσπέραν τε καὶ ὄρθρον τὴν ἀρχὴν τοῦ φωτὸς καὶ τὴν ἀνάπαυσιν προσαγορεύσας.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 5.14c. AD 100

καὶ πάλιν λέγει: Ἰδού, τέθεικά μου τὸν νῶτον εἰς μάστιγας, τὰς δὲ σιαγόνας εἰς ῥαπίσματα.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 2nd c. BC 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD
P.Grenf. 2 31Pathyris105 BC

πόλεως μισθοφόρων ἱππέων ἀπέχειν παρὰ Παοῦτος τοῦ Ὥρου τὸ ἐπιβάλλον αὐτῷ μέρος δανείου οὗ ἔθετο Πατοῦς Ὥρου ὁ τῆς μητρὸς αὐτοῦ Ταρεήσιος πατὴρ ἐπὶ τοῦ ἐν Κροκοδίλων πόλει ἀρχείου

P.Grenf. 2 25Pathyris104 BC

Μεσορὴ κθ ἐν Παθύρει ἐφʼ Ἑρμίου τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ὁμολογία ἣν ἑκόντες συνχωρήσαντες ἔθεντο πρὸς ἑαυτούς, καθʼ ἣν ὁμολογεῖ Νεχθανοῦπις Πατσεοῦτος Πέρσης ὡς ἐτῶν ν συνκεχωρηκέναι Πετεαρσεμθεῖ Πανοβχούνιος

P.Grenf. 2 33Pathyris101 BC

τὰ ἐνλιπόντα αὐτῷ ἑτέρων , τεσσάρων εἰς συμπλήρωσιν ἐτῶν πέντε , ὥστε γεωργῆσαι ἧς ἔθεντο μίσθωσιν ἀπὸ τοῦ προκειμένου ἔτους οὗ καὶ συμπεπεῖσθαι αὐτῷ τῆς συγχωρηθείσης τιμῆς χαλκοῦ ταλάντων

Unsuitable now the harbor being to winter in the majority reached a decision to set sail from there, if somehow they would be able having arrived at Phoenix to winter [there] — a harbor <the> of Crete looking toward [the] southwest and toward [the] northwest.
βουλὴνboulē a decision G1012 Noun · accusative · singular · feminine
12× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A plan or purpose, like the counsel of God in Luke 7:30 and Acts 2:23. It refers to a deliberate intention or advice, as seen in Acts 4:28 and 5:38. This word is used to describe God's will.
Tyndale gloss
plan
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

βουλή (boulē) refers to counsel, purpose, or design, often associated with divine will. It appears frequently in the New Testament, particularly in contexts discussing God's plans (e.g., Luke 7:30, Acts 4:28). The term can also denote a council or assembly in classical usage, but in the New Testament, it primarily emphasizes divine intention.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

βουλή, -ῆς, ἡ

(< βούλομαι),

[in LXX freq. for עֵצָה ;]

counsel, purpose (in cl., esp. of the gods): Lk 23:51, Ac 4:28 5:38 19:1 27:12, 42; pl., I Co 4:5; of the Divine purpose, He 6:17; τ. βουλὴν τ. θελήματος αὐτοῦ, Eph 1:11; β. τ. Θεοῦ, Lk 7:30, Ac 2:23 13:36 20:27.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

βουλή, -ῆς, ἡ, (βούλομαι), fr. Hom. down; often in Sept. for ΤΥ τ counsel, purpose: Lk. xxiii. 51 (where distinguished fr. ἡ mpaéis); Acts v. 38; xxvii. 12 (see τίθημι. 1a.),42; plur. 1 Co. iv. 5; ἡ βουλὴ τοῦ θεοῦ, Acts xiii. 36; esp. of the purpose of God respecting the salvation of men through Christ: Lk. vii. 30; Acts ii. 23; iv. 28; [Heb. vi. 17]; πᾶσαν τὴν βουλὴν τοῦ θεοῦ all the contents of the divine plan, Acts xx. 27; ἡ βουλὴ τοῦ θελήματος αὐτοῦ the counsel of his will, Eph. i. 11.

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

βουλή. The word βουλή is always used both in the LXX and the NT = ‘‘counsel,” and never in its technical sense of ““council.” or this latter usage in Egypt reference may be made to Hohlwein Z’£gyfte Romaine, p- 134ff., and to |

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

βουλή (boulē) — plan.

βουλή, ἡ,

Doric dialect βωλά Decrees Byzantine cited in [Refs 4th c.BC+], Aeolic dialect βόλλα [Refs 2nd c.BC+]: accusative plural βουλᾰς [Refs 8th c.BC+]: (βούλομαι):— will, determination, especially of the gods, [Refs 8th c.BC+]

2. counsel, design, βουλὰς βουλεύουσι [Refs 8th c.BC+]: generally, counsel, advice, opposed to μάχεσθαι, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; νυκτὶ βουλὴν διδόναι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; β. ποιεῖσθαι, ={βουλεύεσθαι}, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν βουλῇ γενέσθαι πότερον.. [Refs 1st c.BC+]; τούτοις οὐκ ἔστι κοινὴ β. they have no common ground of argument, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: in plural, counsels, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ἐν βουλαῖς ἄριστος, ἐν βουλαῖσι κράτιστος, [Refs]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

βουλή

boule

from 1014; volition, i.e. (objectively) advice, or (by implication)

purpose:--+ advise, counsel, will.

see GREEK for 1014

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

βουλή, ῆς, ἡ

n.f.

counsel, deliberate wisdom

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

βουλή boulē 12x

counsel, purpose, design, determination, decree, Lk. 7:30; 23:51, et al. freq.; by impl. secret thoughts, cogitations of the mind, 1 Cor. 4:5

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

βουλή βούλομαι will, determination, Lat. consilium, esp. of the gods, Il., etc.

a counsel, piece of advice, plan, design, id. Il., Hdt., attic:—in pl. counsels, Aesch.

a Council of the elders or chiefs, a Senate, Hom., Aesch.:—at Athens, the Council of 500 created by Cleisthenes, Hdt., Ar., etc.:— βουλῆς εἶναι to be of the Council, a member of it, Thuc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-ASF — Noun · accusative · singular · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

de-sizh'-un: Has several different shades of meaning. It expresses the formation of a judgment on a matter under consideration. It expresses the quality of being firm or positive in one's actions. It expresses the termination of a contest or question in favor of one side or the other, as the decision of the battle, or the decision of the judge.

1. National Decisions:

Until recent times the decision of disputed points between nations was determined by force of arms. Thus the questions of dispute were decided between Israel and the surrounding tribes, between Israel and Assyria, between Israel and Egypt, and later between Judea and Rome.

2. Judicial Decisions:

In the earliest times the questions of dispute between individuals were decided by the patriarch who was the head of the family. When Israel became a nation men were appointed to decide the difficulties between the people. At first this…

Nave's Topical Bible

→ General scriptures concerning De 30:19; Jos 23:8; 24:15; 1Sa 12:20; 1Ki 18:21; Ps 37:34; 69:13; Pr 4:25-27; Isa 50:7; Mt 10:22; 11:6; 24:13; 25:23; Mr 13:13; Lu 7:23; Joh 8:31; 15:4,5,7,9; Ac 11:23; 13:43; 14:22;

- Necessary to the service of God

Lu 9:62

- Exhortations to

Jos 24:14,15

- EXHIBITED IN

. Seeking God with the heart

2Ch 15:12

. Keeping the commandments of God

Ne 10:29

. Being on the Lord's side

Ex 32:26

. Following God fully

Nu 14:24; 32:12; Jos 14:8

. Serving God

Isa 56:6

. Loving God perfectly

De 6:5

. Blessedness of

Jos 1:7

- OPPOSED TO

. A divided service

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
33%counsel
counsel33% · 4×plan25% · 3×purpose25% · 3×decision8% · 1×motives8% · 1×

12 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 5 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object58%subject25%adverbial17%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 12 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
νομικόςabout law, one lσυγκατατίθεμαιI give a vote wiκαίand, even, also,
ὁρίζωI define, determine,
Article the
θεόςGod, a god
Article the
τίθημιI put, place
πολύςmuch, many, ofte
στρατιώτηςa soldier
δέbut, on the othe
βουλήa decision12×
what comes after →
Article the
θεόςGod, a godκαρδίαthe heart, innerθέλημαwill, wish, desi
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theπρόγνωσιςforeknowledge
προορίζωI foreordain, predet
γίνομαιI come into bein
οὗτος
Disj
κοιμάομαιI fall asleep, am as
καίand, even, also,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceβουλή · 12× in the New Testament
Acts Luke 1 Corinthians Ephesians Hebrews
Across the New Testament5 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 87 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 3.205c. AD 40

ἔπειτα πάντ’ ἐστὶν αὐτὸς ἑαυτῷ τὰ τιμιώτατα, συγγενὴς οἰκεῖος φίλος ἀρετὴ εὐδαιμονία μακαριότης ἐπιστήμη σύνεσις ἀρχὴ τέλος ὅλον πᾶν δικαστὴς γνώμη βουλὴ νόμος πρᾶξις ἡγεμονία.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.338c. AD 75–95

Ἰάκωβος δὲ οὔτʼ ἀντιλέγειν ἔχων διὰ τὸ ἀξίωμα τοῦ παρακαλοῦντος οὔτε νόμιμον ἡγούμενος ἀλλοφύλῳ συνοικίζειν τὴν θυγατέρα ἠξίωσεν ἐπιτρέψαι αὐτῷ βουλὴν ἀγαγεῖν περὶ ὧν παρακαλεῖ.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 6.7c. AD 100

λέγει γὰρ ὁ προφήτης ἐπὶ τὸν Ἰσραήλ: Οὐαὶ τῇ ψυχῇ αὐτῶν, ὅτι βεβούλευνται βουλὴν πονηρὰν καθ̓ ἑαυτῶν, εἰπόντες: Δήσωμεν τὸν δίκαιον, ὅτι δύσχρηστος ἡμῖν ἐστίν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 2nd c. AD 6th c. AD undated
P.Leid.Inst. 1 36ArsinoitesAD 101–AD 200

τὸν υἱὸν τῆς Σ … … ἐμοῖς μάλιστα μ … … … βουλη ἐμαρτυρ … … … … … ισως καὶ τουτ … … … ὑπὲρ Σαραποδώρ

P.Louvre 1 38Soknopaiu Nesos (Arsinoites)AD 216–AD 217

ἔτους, Τῦβι. Διεγράφησαν Αὐρηλίῳ Νίννῳ ἀρχιερ- βουλευτῇ τῆς Ἀρσινοιτῶν πόλεως αἱρεθέντι ὑπὸ τῆς κρατίστης βουλῆς μεριδάρχῃ Ἡρακλείδου μερίδος διπλώματος ὄνων ἁλιέων κώμης Σοκνοπαίου Νήσου ὑπὲρ κε ἔτους δραχμαὶ δεκαὲξ

P.Flor. 2 227Theadelphia (Arsinoites)AD 257

ἐρρῶσθαί σε εὔχομαι φίλτατε. ἔτους δ Μεσορὴ ιγ. λαβὼν παρὰ μοῦ τὰς ἴσας ἐὰν βούλῃ

Unsuitable now the harbor being to winter in the majority reached a decision to set sail from there, if somehow they would be able having arrived at Phoenix to winter [there] — a harbor <the> of Crete looking toward [the] southwest and toward [the] northwest.
ἀναχθῆναιanagō to set sail G321 Verb · aorist · passive · infinitive
23× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To lead or bring something up, like Jesus being led into the wilderness in Matthew 4:1.
Tyndale gloss
to lead
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

ἀνάγω is built from the prefix ἀν- meaning 'up' and the root ἄγω meaning 'to lead.' It covers a range of meanings including to lead up, to offer sacrifices, and to set sail. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts such as leading Jesus into the wilderness (Mt 4:1) and setting sail (Lk 8:22).

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἀν-άγω

[in LXX chiefly for עָלָה hi.;]

to lead or bring up: seq. είς, c. acc. loc., Mt 4:1, Lk 2:22 4:5 (WH om. είς, κ.τ.λ.), Ac 9:39 16:34; of raising the dead (cl.), ἐκ νεκρῶν, Ro 10:7, He 13:20; to produce and set before, τ. λαῷ, Ac 12:4 (MM, VGT, s.v.); in sacrificial sense (MM, VGT, s.v.), to offer, θυσίαν, Ac 7:41. Mid., in nautical sense (Hom., Hdt., Thuc., al.), to put to sea: Lk 8:22, Ac…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀν-άγω : 2 aor. ἀνήγαγον, inf. ἀναγαγεῖν, [ptep. dvayayov]; Pass., [pres. avayopar]; 1 aor. [ef. sub fin.] ἀνήχθην ; [fr. Hom. down]; to lead up, to lead or bring into a higher place; foll. by εἰς with acc. of the place: Lk. ii. 22; iv. 5 [Δ Tr WH om. Lbr. the cl.]; xxii. 66 [T Tr WH ἀπήγαγον); Acts ix. 39; xvi. 34; Mt. iv. 1 (εἰς τ. ἔρημον, sc. fr. the low bank of the Jordan). τινὰ ἐκ νεκρῶν fr. the dead in the world below, to the upper world, Heb. xiii. 20; Ro. x. 7; τινὰ τῷ λαῷ to bring one forth who has been detained in prison (a lower place), and set him before the people to be tried, Acts xii. 4; θυσίαν τῷ εἰδώλῳ to offer sacrifice to the idol, because the victim is lifted up on the altar, Acts vii. 41. Navigators are κατ᾽ ἐξοχήν said ἀνάγεσθαι (pass. [or mid. ]) when they /aunch out, set sail, put to sea, (so ἀναγωγή in Justin. Mart. dial. ο. Tr. c. 142 [and in the elassies])…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀνάγω (anagō) — to lead.

ἀνάγω,

future ἀνάξω[Refs 5th c.BC+]aorist 2 ἀνήγαγον, etc.: (see. ἄγω):—opposed to κατάγω,

I. lead up from a lower place to a higher, ἐς Ολυμπον[Refs 6th c.BC+]; ἱερὸν ἀ. ξόανον, of the Trojan horse, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ πέπλος ἀνάγεται εἰς τὴν ἀκρόπολιν [Refs]

I.2. lead up to the high sea, carry by sea, λαὸν ἀνήγαγεν ἐνθάδ᾽ ἀείρας[Refs 8th c.BC+] conduct, carry to a place, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἀ. ναῦν put a ship to sea, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀνάγειν absolutely in the same sense, [Refs 4th c.BC+] —but this is more common in middle, see infr. B.I.

I.3. take up from the coast into the interior, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; especially from Asia Minor into Central Asia, ἀ. παρὰ or ὡς βασιλέα[Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀνάγω

anago

from 303 and 71; to lead up; by extension to bring out; specially, to

sail away:--bring (again, forth, up again), depart, launch (forth),

lead (up), loose, offer, sail, set forth, take up.

see GREEK for 303

see GREEK for 71

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀνάγω

v.

I lead up, put to sea, set sail

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀνάγω anagō 23x

to conduct; to lead or convey up from a lower place to a higher, Lk. 4:5; to offer up, as a sacrifice, Acts 7:41; to lead out, produce, Acts 12:4; as a nautical term (in the middle or passive), to set sail, put to sea, Lk. 8:22

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀνάγω to lead up from a lower place to a higher, Theogn., etc.

to lead up to the high sea, to carry by sea, Hom., etc.; ἀν. ναῦν to put a ship to sea, Hdt.; absol. in the same sense, id. Hdt.; —this is more common in Mid.

to take up from the coast into the interior, Od., Hdt.; esp. from Asia Minor into Central Asia, Xen.

to bring up from the dead, Hes., Aesch.

ἀν. χορόν to conduct the choir, Hes., Eur., etc.; also, ἀν. ὁρτήν to celebrate a festival, Hdt.

to lift up, raise, κάρα, τὸ ὄμμα Soph., etc.

ἀν. παιᾶνα to lift up the paean, id. Soph.

in various senses, ἀν. αἷμα to bring up blood, Plut.; ἀν. ποταμόν to bring a river up [over its banks], Luc.; ἀν. φάλαγγα, like ἀναπτύσσειν, Plut.; to bring up a prisoner for examination, Xen., etc.

to bring back, Hom., etc.

to refer a matter to another, Dem.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-APN — Verb · aorist · passive · infinitive
aorist passive infinitive — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-APN Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Passive Mood: iNfinitive TVM equivalent: G5683

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
9%they brought
they brought9% · 2×having sailed9% · 2×having brought9% · 2×we set sail9% · 2×offered4% · 1×bring out4% · 1×he sailed4% · 1×sail4% · 1×other renderings48% · 11×

23 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 19 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb96%adverbial4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 23 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
λίμνηa lakeἐκεῖνοςἐγώ
ἸησοῦςJesus
Article the
ΜωϋσῆςMoses
νόμοςa law, the Mosai
παραγίνομαιI appear, come, arri
ὅς
πάσχαAram
Article the
ἀνάγωto set sail23×
what comes after →
εἰς
Article the
αὐτός
εἰςδείκνυμιI point out, shoArticle the
δέbut, on the other ha
ἀπό
ἀπό
Article the
θυσίαa sacrifice
Article the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἀνάγω · 23× in the New Testament
Acts Luke Hebrews Matthew Romans
Across the New Testament5 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 54 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria
Philo of AlexandriaOn Husbandry 127c. AD 40

οὐ διὰ τοῦτο μέντοι δόξαντι θυσίας ἀμέμπτους ἀναγαγεῖν τῷ Κάιν λόγιον ἐξέπεσε μὴ θαρρεῖν ὡς κεκαλλιερηκότι;

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.21c. AD 75–95

τοῦτο δὴ παιδεῦσαι βουληθεὶς Μωυσῆς τὸ παίδευμα τοὺς ἑαυτοῦ πολίτας τῆς τῶν νόμων θέσεως οὐκ ἀπὸ συμβολαίων καὶ τῶν πρὸς ἀλλήλους δικαίων ἤρξατο τοῖς ἄλλοις παραπλησίως, ἀλλʼ ἐπὶ τὸν θεὸν καὶ τὴν τοῦ κόσμου κατασκευὴν τὰς γνώμας αὐτῶν ἀναγαγὼν καὶ…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. BC 2nd c. BC 6th c. AD 2nd c. AD 4th c. AD

τοὺς μισθοὺς κατὰ τὴν ἐμὴν διαγραφὴν κελεύω. τοὺς δὲ ἀντιλέγοντας ἐπὶ τὸν γραμματέα μου ἀνάγεσθαι βούλομαι, ὃς ἢ αὐτὸς κωλύσει ἀδικεῖσθαι τοὺς ἰδιώτας ἢ ἐμοὶ ἀνανγελεῖ. τὰ δὲ διὰ

P.Mich. 9 525Karanis (Arsinoites)AD 119–AD 124

τὰ ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ … ρκλερ … τρόπῳ ἐβάσταξε. ὅθεν τὸν ἀρχέφοδον τῆς κώμης ἀνήγαγον ὃς ἐχειρογράφησε τὸν προκείμενον ἀδελφὸν εἶναι τὸν ἐπελθόντα. διὸ πεποίηκα τήν σοι … α

P.Vars. 11Arsinoites (?)AD 138–AD 161

δ εἰκοστὸν λβ ἀπὸ ἀνηγμένης ἐπὶ οὐσίαν ἀποφορᾶς … … παραδείσου ἀπὸ ἐπιγραφομένης ἀμπέλου ἀναχθῆναι τῷ ιβ ἔτει ἀποφορὰν … … ωθ ἐκκεκόφθαι καὶ ἀναχθῆναι ἀμπέλου ἀρούρας δ η

Unsuitable now the harbor being to winter in the majority reached a decision to set sail from there, if somehow they would be able having arrived at Phoenix to winter [there] — a harbor <the> of Crete looking toward [the] southwest and toward [the] northwest.
ἐκεῖθεν,kakeithen from there, G1564 Adverb · correlative
27× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
From that place, or 'thence', is what this word means, as seen in Matthew 4:21. It's used to show where someone or something comes from. The Bible uses it to describe movement and origin.
Tyndale gloss
from there
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἐκεῖθεν (i.e., *ekeithen*) is an adverb meaning 'thence' or 'from that place.' It is used in the New Testament to indicate both physical location and time, as seen in verses like Matthew 4:21 and Mark 6:1. The word is derived from ἐκεῖ (i.e., *eke*) and has various applications in classical literature, often contrasting with ἐκεῖσε.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐκεῖθεν

adv.,

[in LXX chiefly for מׅשָׁם ;]

of place, thence: Mt 4:21, Mk 6:1, al.

Of time, thereafter (v.s. κἀκεῖθεν).

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐκεῖθεν, adv. of place, thence, from that place, [A. V. sometimes from thence]: Mt. iv. 21; Mk. vi. 1; Lk. ix. 4; Jn. iv. 43; Acts xiii.4; and often in the historical bks. of the N. T. οἱ ἐκεῖθεν elliptically for οἱ ἐκεῖθεν διαβῆναι θέλοντες, Lk. xvi. 26 (where L WH om. oi).

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐκεῖθεν (= Selections, p. 103) the word is used somewhat pleonastically—memAdvykay ἡμῶς (ἡμᾶς) ἐκε[1], τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τῇ ὅτι (1. ὅτε) ἔπλευσες, ‘they deceived us there on the 12th, the day you sailed.” For the laxer use = ἐκεῖσε, as in Rom. 15**, cf. P Meyer 208 (1st half iii/A.D.) ἵνα ἐκεῖ πέμπω τὰς ἔπιστολάς. For a contrast with ἐνταῦθα, see Prezsigke 100219 f. (time of Diocletian ἢ) τὰ ἐκεῖ θαύματ[α] εἶδον kal τὰ ἐνταῦθα. The word is MGr.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐκεῖθεν (ekeithen) — from there.

ἐκεῖθεν,

poetry κεῖθεν (the only form used by [Refs 8th c.BC+]: Aeolic dialect κήνοθεν [Refs 7th c.BC+]: Doric dialect τηνῶθεν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τηνῶθε [Refs 3rd c.BC+]:— adverb from that place, thence, opposed to ἐκεῖσε, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of a person, τἀκεῖθεν εἰ ποθούμεθα on his part, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. ={ἐκεῖ}, οἱ ἐ. [Refs 5th c.BC+] on yon side of the grove, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

3. by attraction for ἐκεῖσε, βῆναι κεῖθεν ὅθενπερ ἥκει [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II. thence, from that fact, γνοίη δ᾽ ἄν τις ἐ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]

III. of Time, thenceforward, [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐκεῖθεν

ekeithen

from 1563; thence:--from that place, (from) thence, there.

see GREEK for 1563

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐκεῖθεν

Adv

thence, from that place

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐκεῖθεν ekeithen 37x

from there, Mt. 4:21; 5:26

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐκεῖθεν from ἐκεῖ from that place, thence, Lat. illinc, opp. to ἐκεῖσε, Soph., etc.

= ἐκεῖ, Aesch., Thuc.:—c. gen., τοὐκεῖθεν ἄλσους on yon side of the grove, Soph.

thence, from that fact, Isocr., Dem.

of Time, thereafter, next, Il.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adv-K — Adverb · correlative
adverb — it qualifies the verb, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

ADV-K ADVerb or adverb and particle combined merged by crasis with a second word; declension is that of the second word

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
96%from there
from there96% · 27×there4% · 1×

28 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 27 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ἐξέρχομαιI go out, come out
μήNegκαίand, even, also,ἄνDisj
μεταβαίνωI leave, depart, rem
καίand, even, also,αὐτός
καίand, even, also, nam
μένωI remain, abideἐντεῦθενhence, from this
ἀναχωρέωI return, retire, de
γινώσκωI come to know, ἸησοῦςJesus
προβαίνωI go forward
καίand, even, also,
ἐκεῖθενfrom there,27×
what comes after →
Article the
ἸησοῦςJesusδιδάσκωI teach
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
ἄλλοςother, another, ἄνθρωποςa man, one of th
ἕωςuntil, as far as
ἄνDisjκαίand, even, also,
ἔρχομαιI come, go
εἰς
καίand, even, also, nam
ἀκολουθέωI accompany, attἔρχομαιI come, go

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐκεῖθεν · 27× in the New Testament
Matthew Mark Acts Luke John Revelation
Across the New Testament6 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 65 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Ignatius of Antioch The Didache The Shepherd of Hermas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Posterity of Cain 76c. AD 40

„ἀναστὰς ἀπόδραθι εἰς τὴν Μεσοποταμίαν εἰς τὸν οἶκον Βαθουὴλ πατρὸς τῆς μητρός σου, καὶ λάβε σεαυτῷ ἐκεῖθεν γυναῖκα ἐκ τῶν θυγατέρων Λάβαν ἀδελφοῦ τῆς μητρός σου“ (Gen.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 3.argc. AD 75–95

ὡς ἐκεῖθεν ἄρας Μωυσῆς ἤγαγεν εἰς τοὺς ὅρους τῶν Χαναναίων καὶ τοὺς κατοψομένους αὐτῶν τὴν χώραν καὶ τῶν πόλεων τὸ μέγεθος ἐξαπέστειλεν.

The DidacheThe Didache 1.5c. AD 100

οὐαὶ τῷ λαμβάνονται: εἰ μὲν γὰρ χρείαν ἔχων λαμβάνει τις, ἀθῷος ἔσται: ὁ δὲ μὴ χρείαν ἔχων δώσει δίκην, ἱνατί ἔλαβε καὶ εἰς τί: ἐν συνοχῇ δὲ γενόμενος ἐξετασθήσεται περὶ ὧν ἔπραξε, καὶ οὐκ ἐξελεύσεται ἐκεῖθεν, μέχρις οὗ ἀποδῷ τὸν ἔσχατον κοδράντην.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
O.Did. 319DidymoiAD 77–AD 92

Ἰούλις Οὐαλερίῳ τῷ ἀδελφῷ χαίρειν. ἔπεμψά σοι ἐπιστολὰς τέσσαρας διὰ τοῦ γαλεαρίου τοῦ ἐκεῖθεν ἀπὸ Διδύμων καὶ διὰ Κορνηλίου γαλεαρίου ἄλλας γ ὥστε ζ. εἰ ἔλαβες, ἀντίγραψον πόσας

P.Mich. 8 486AD 101–AD 200

ἐπιστεῖλαι ἐμοὶ μᾶλλον προσεχέστερον ἐπέστειλας, φημὶ ὅτι χρείας ἐπειγούσης εἰς Ἀντινόου μελλήσω ἀνέρχεσθαι καὶ ἐκεῖθεν ἐπιστελῶ πρὸς σὲ τούτων χάριν. εἰ δέ πως Τύχη ἀπʼ Ἀντινόου με πάλιν ἐνθάδε

P.Mich. 8 487RomAD 101–AD 200

Ἀπολλινάριος Σεμπρωνίωι τῶι τιμιωτάτωι ἀδελφῶι χαίρειν. γενάμενος ἐν Ῥώμῃ ἐπέγνων σε ἐκεῖθεν, ἐξεληλυθέναι πρὸ τοῦ με ἐλθεῖν, καὶ λίαν ἐλυπήθην διὰ τὸ μὴ τεθεωρηκέναι σε. ἀλλὰ

Unsuitable now the harbor being to winter in the majority reached a decision to set sail from there, if somehow they would be able having arrived at Phoenix to winter [there] — a harbor <the> of Crete looking toward [the] southwest and toward [the] northwest.
εἴei if G1487 Conditional particle
501× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
rarer in Acts than elsewhere in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means 'if' and is used to express conditions or questions. It appears in many Bible verses, such as Matthew 11:14 and Romans 8:25, introducing a condition or hypothesis.
Tyndale gloss
if
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word εἰ, transliterated as ei, is a primary conditional particle meaning 'if' or 'whether.' It is used in various contexts, including conditions, indirect questions, and expressions of wishes. In the New Testament, it appears frequently, often followed by different verb tenses to indicate various conditions. The lexicons do not present significant disagreement on its usage.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

εἰ,

conjunctive particle, used in conditions and in indirect questions.

Conditional, if;

c. indic., expressing a general assumption;

pres.: seq. indic, pres., Mt 11:14, Ro 8:25, al.; seq. imperat., Mk 4:23 9:22, Jo 15:18, I Co 7:9, al.; seq. fut. indic., Lk 16:31, Ro 8:11, al.; seq. pf. or aor., with negation in apodosis, Mt 12:26, Ro 4:14, al.; similarly, seq. impf., Lk 17:6, Jo 8:39; seq. quæst.,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

εἰ 109 εἰ WH, s0 Trin Mt. xii. 41; Ὀζείας L T Tr WH; Πειλᾶτος T WH; Σεμεείν T Tr WH; Ταβειθά WH; Χερουβείν 1, T Tr WH (-βίμ RG); Χοραζείν T Tr WH; ἀφείδεια L; εἰδέα T Tr WH; ἐπαρχεία T WH; ἐπιπόθεια WH; ἡλεί T ; πανοικεί TWH; ῥαββεί T WH; ῥαββουνεί WH; σαβαχθανεί Tr WH; ταλειθά WH; τάχειον WH; τραπεζείτης T WH.| el, is first a conditional particle, ἐγ (Lat. si) ; secondly, an interrogative particle, whether, (Lat. an, num, ne). I. εἰ CoNDITIONAL (on the difference between it and ἐάν, see ἐάν, I. 1 b.) is connected, according to the variety of conditions, with various tenses and moods; viz. ἘΣ with the Indicative of all tenses, when anything is simply and generally assumed to be, or to be done, or to have been done, or to be about to be, (W. § 41 b., 2; ef. 42, 2; [Β. 220(190)]). a. withthe Ind. Present; a. foll. in the apodosis by the ind. pres.: Mt. xix. 10 (εἰ οὕτως ἐστὶν ἡ αἰτία...…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ΕἸ , J ἐκπλησσω γὰρ τὸ ἀγαθὸν τοῦ ἀστέρος καὶ εἰς τὸ ἐναντίον ἐκπίπτει. See also Michel 827 A (mid. 11,8.0.) τό τε νόμισμα τὸ ἐκπεπτωκὸς ἀριθμῶι, of coins that have fallen out of use. The verb is not infrequent with reference to crops that “fall to be included”’ in the produce of a particular year, eg. BGU II. 5915" (A.p. 56-7) βουλόμεθα μισθώσασθαι τοὺς ἐκπεπτωκότας εἰς τὸ τρίτον ἔτος Νέρωνος. . . φοινεικίνους καρπούς, P Fay ο115 (A.p. 99) ἐϊλαϊκοὺς καρποὺς ἐκπεππτωκότας (/. ἐκπεπτωκ --Ἰ εἰς τὸ ἐνεστὸ(ς) τρίτον ἔτος. Cf. P Hib I. γ810 (B.c. 244--3) a letter requesting that two persons should be released from some public service—81a τὸ μὴ ἐκπεσίεῖν αὐτοῖς τὸ viv λειτουργῆσαι, ‘because it is not at present their turn to serve,’’ where the editors point out that éxmec[et]v, which has been corrected in the papyrus, is practically equivalent to προσπέσηι in 1.4 of the same document. For the…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

εἰ (ei) — if.

εἰ,

Attic dialect-Ionic dialect and [Refs 4th c.AD+] ἤ [Refs] in Epic dialect:— Particle used interjectionally with imperative and to express a wish, but usually either in conditions, if, or in indirect questions, whether. In the former use its regular negative is μ; in the latter, οὐ.

__A INTERJECTIONALLY, in [Refs 8th c.BC+], come now! with imperative, εἰ δὲ.. ἄκουσον [Refs 8th c.BC+]

__A.2 in wishes, with optative, ἀλλ᾽ εἴ τις.. καλέσειεν [Refs]; so later, εἴ μοι ξυνείη μοῖρα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; of unattained wishes, in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; later with past tenses of indicative, εἰ γάρ μ᾽ ὑπὸ γῆν.. ἧκεν [Refs 4th c.BC+]; εἰ γὰρ τοσαύτην δύναμιν εἶχον ὥστε.. [Refs 8th c.BC+]infinitive (compare the use of infinitive in commands), αἰ γὰρ τοῖος ἐὼν.. ἐμὸς γαμβρὸς καλέεσθαι…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

εἰ

ei

a primary particle of conditionality; if, whether, that,

etc.:--forasmuch as, if, that, (al-)though, whether. Often used in

connection or composition with other particles, especially as in 1489,

1490, 1499, 1508, 1509, 1512, 1513, 1536, 1537. See also 1437.

see GREEK for 1489

see GREEK for 1490

see GREEK for 1499

see GREEK for 1508

see GREEK for 1509

see GREEK for 1512

see GREEK for 1513

see GREEK for 1536

see GREEK for 1537

see GREEK for 1437

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

εἰ

Cond.

if

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

εἰ ei 502x

if, Mt. 4:3, 6; 12:7; Acts 27:39, freq.; since, Acts 4:9; whether, Mk. 9:23; Acts 17:11; that, in certain expressions, Acts 26:8, 23; Heb. 7:15; by a suppression of the apodosis of a sentence, εἰ serves to express a wish; O if! O that! Lk. 19:42; 22:42; also a strong negation, Mk. 8:12; Heb. 3:11; 4:3; εἰ καί, if even, though, although, Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
COND — Conditional particle
conditional particle — it marks the clause as a condition.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

COND CONDitional particle or conjunction

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
74%if
if74% · 388×only17% · 89×whether3% · 14×lest3% · 14×other renderings3% · 17×

522 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 12 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial7%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 501 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδίδωμιI offer, giveἐπερωτάωI interrogate, q
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςἄρτοςbread, a loaf, fδίδωμιI offer, give
ὅτιthat, since, because
ΒηθσαϊδάPropγινώσκωI come to know, σύ
σύ
ἐνλέγωI say, speakἐπερωτάωI interrogate, q
λέγωI say, speak
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςἐγώ
εἰif501×
what comes after →
δέbut, on the other ha
τὶςArticle theεἰ δὲ μήNeg
μήNeg
Article theἐνεἷςone
τὶς
θέλωI will, wish, deδοκέωI think, seem, aἔχωI have, hold, po
γάρfor
Article theπιστεύωI believe, have διά
Article the
θεόςGod, a godΣατανᾶςan adversary, Saδεξιόςon the right han

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceεἰ · 501× in the New Testament
1 Corinthians Matthew Luke John Romans 2 Corinthians Acts Mark Galatians Hebrews Revelation 1 Peter

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament25 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 307 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Unsuitable now the harbor being to winter in the majority reached a decision to set sail from there, if somehow they would be able having arrived at Phoenix to winter [there] — a harbor <the> of Crete looking toward [the] southwest and toward [the] northwest.
πωςpōs somehow G4458 Adverb · interrogative
104× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
In plain English
Tyndale gloss
how?!
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

πώς, an enclitic particle, on which see under εἴπως [i.e ei, LI. 14] and μήπως. P master, chief, prince; cf. Levy, Chald. WB. ib. d. Tar. gumim, ii. p. 401), Rabboni, Rabbuni (apparently [yet cf. reff. below] the Galilean pronunciation of »3)37), a title of honor and reverence by which Jesus is addressed; as interpreted by John, equiv. to διδάσκαλος: Jn. xx. 16; Mk. x. 51, (see ῥαββί). Cf. Keim iii. p. 560 [Eng. trans. vi. p. 311 sq.]; Delitzsch in the Zeitschr. f. d. luth. Theol. for 1876, pp. 409 and 606; also for 1878, p.7; [Ginsburg and Hamburger, as in she preceding word; Kautzsch, Gram. d. Bibl.-Aram. p. 10].

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

πως, enclitic, “ἴῃ some way,” ‘in any way”: P Oxy I. 95% (A.D. 129) ἄλλως πως, “in any other way,” 74. 9305 (iv/A.D.) σπουδάζων] εἴ πὼς ἐκ παντὸς τρόπου δυνηθείης [πρὸς ἡμᾶς] ἀφικέσθαι, ‘being anxious that you should come to us by every possible means in your power” (Edd.), and Syl 510 (=* 364)" (after B.c. 297) ἂν δέ πως ἄλλως πρὸς αὑτοὺς ὁμολογήσωσιν. See also s.v. μήπως. N N le

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

πως (pōs) — how.

πως,

Ionic dialect κως, enclitic adverb of Manner, in any way, at all, by any means, οὐ μέν π. ἅλιον πέλει ὅρκιον [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἀλλὰ μὴ γένοιτό π. [Refs 4th c.BC+]; compare οὔπως, μήπως: frequently after other adverbs of Manner, ὧδέ π. somehow so, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἄλλως π. in some other way, [Refs]; εὐσχημόνως π. [Refs]; sometimes merely to qualify their force, when it cannot be always rendered by any one English equivalent, ἀεί π. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; μάλα π[Refs 5th c.BC+]; μόγις π. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ γὰρ κάταγμα τυγχάνω ῥίψασά π. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀπώκνησάν π. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐάν π. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἤν π. [Refs 5th c.BC+]: expressing uncertainty, I suppose, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

πως pōs 15x

enclitic particle, in any way, by any means, Acts 27:12; Rom. 1:10

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adv-I — Adverb · interrogative
adverb — it qualifies the verb, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

ADV-I ADVerb or adverb and particle combined Interrogative

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
75%perhaps
perhaps75% · 12×somehow19% · 3×at all6% · 1×

16 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial7%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 14 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

Unsuitable now the harbor being to winter in the majority reached a decision to set sail from there, if somehow they would be able having arrived at Phoenix to winter [there] — a harbor <the> of Crete looking toward [the] southwest and toward [the] northwest.
δύναιντοdunamai they would be able G1410 Verb · present · no voice stated · optative · third person · plural
209× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To be able or have power, as in Matthew 6:24 and Mark 2:7, meaning to have the capability or strength to do something.
Tyndale gloss
be able
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

δύναμαι, transliterated as dunamai, means 'to be able' or 'to have power.' It can refer to personal ability, permission, or opportunity. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, such as in Matthew 6:24 and Mark 2:7. The lexicons indicate that it can be used with an infinitive or an accusative, but there is some variation in the forms and usages noted in different sources.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

δύναμαι, depon.,

[in LXX chiefly for יָכֹל ;]

to be able, have power, whether by personal ability, permission, or opportunity: c. inf. (M, Pr., 205; WM, § 44, 3) pres., Mt 6:24, Mk 2:7, Jo 3:2, I Co 10:21, al.; c. inf. aor., Mt 3:9, Mk 1:45, Jo 3:3, 4 Ro 8:39, al.; c. acc., to be able to do something: Mk 9:22, Lk 12:26; II Co 13:8; absol., to be able, capable, powerful: Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

δύναμαι, depon. verb, pres. indic. 2 pers. sing. δύνασαι and, acc. to a rarer form occasional in the poets and fr. Polyb. on to be met with in prose writ. also (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 359; [ WH. App. p.168; W.§ 18, 2b.; Veitch 8. v.]), δύνῃ (Mk. ix. 22 sq. L T Tr WH; [Lk. xvi. 2 T WH Tr txt. ]; Rey. ii. 2); impf. ἐδυνάμην and Attic ἠδυνάμην, between which forms the Mss. and editions are almost everywhere divided, [in Mk. vi. 19; xiv. 5; Lk. Vili. 19; xix. 3; Jn. ix. 33; xii. 39 all edd. read 78., so RG in Mt. xxvi. 9; Lk. i. 22; Jn. xi. 37; Rev. xiv. 3; on the other hand, in Mt. xxii. 46; Lk. i. 22; Jn. xi. 37; Rey. xiv. 3, L T Tr WH all read ἐδ., so T WH in Mt. xxvi. 9; RGin Mt. xxii. 46. Cf. WH. App. p. 162; W. § 12, 1b.; B. 83 (29) ]; fut. δυνήσομαι ; 1 aor. ἠδυνήθην and (in Mk. vii. 24 T WH, after codd. 8B only; in Mt. xvii. 16 cod. B) ἠδυνάσθην (cf. [WH τι. 5. and p. 169]; Kiihner §…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

δύναμαι. The following exx. of this common verb may be cited— P Par 471° (c. B.C. 153) (= Selections, p. 22) ἐνβέβληκαν (sc. οἱ θεοὶ) ὑμᾶς εἰς ὕλην μεγάλην Kal οὗ δυνάμεθα ἀποθανεῖν, ““they have cast us into a great forest, where we may possibly die,” P Oxy IV. 743% (B.c. 2) οὐκ ἠδυνάσθην συντυχεῖν ᾿Α., “1 was unable to meet A.,” 26. 7γ4413 (B.c. 1) [ΞΞ Selections, p. 33) πῶς δύναμαί σε ἐπιλαθεῖν ; ‘how can I forget you?”, P Lond 144™ (?i/a.p.) (ΞΞ 11. p. 253) ἵνα δυνηθῇ τὸ παιδάριόν μου ἐλθεῖν mpd[s ple, P Oxy LIT. 47218 (4 A.D. 130) οὐ δύναται γὰρ κεκλέφθαι τὸ μηδ᾽ ἀρχὴν γενόμενον μὴ δυνατὸν δ᾽ εἶναι, ‘for it is impossible for that to have been stolen which neither ever existed at all nor could exist” (Edd.). It takes an ace. ve? (as in Lk 1255) in P Ryl IL. 7758 (A.p. 192) οὐ yap δύναμαι κοσμητείαν. In P Leid {50 (ii/B.c.) ἔφη δύνασθαι τὰ ἔργα πάντα ἐπιτελέσιν ἐν ἡλι (?—was ὀλίγαις…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

δύναμαι (dunamai) — be able.

δύνᾰμαι [ῠ],

2nd pers. singular δύνασαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Aeolic dialect and Doric dialect δύνᾳ [Refs 7th c.BC+]; δύνῃ is subjunctive, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ionic dialect 3rd.pers. plural δυνέαται [Refs 5th c.BC+]; subjunctive δύνωμαι, Ionic dialect 2nd pers. singular δύνηαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]: imperfect 2nd pers. singular ἐδύνω [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ionic dialect 3rd.pers. plural ἐδυνέατο [Refs 5th c.BC+]: future δυνήσομαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Doric dialect δυνᾱσοῦμαι [Refs 4th c.BC+]: aorist ἐδυνησάμην [Refs 8th c.BC+], Epic dialect δυν- [Refs]; subjunctive δυνήσωνται [Refs 7th c.BC+], never in good Attic dialect, falsa lectio in [Refs 4th c.BC+]passive forms, Epic dialect, Ionic dialect, Lyric poetry, ἐδυνάσθην or δυνάσθην [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Trag. and Attic dialect Prose ἐδυνήθην [Refs 5th c.BC+]: perfect δεδύνημαι [Refs 4th c.BC+] —The double…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

δύναμαι

dunamai

of uncertain affinity; to be able or possible:--be able, can (do, +

-not), could, may, might, be possible, be of power.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

δύναμαι

v.

I am powerful, am able

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

δύναμαι dynamai 210x

to be able, either intrinsically and absolutely, which is the ordinary signification; or, for specific reasons, Mt. 9:15; Lk. 16:2 See ability; (be) able; can.

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

δύναμαι decl. in pres. and imperf. like ἵσταμαι Dep.

to be able, capable, strong enough to do, c. inf., Hom., etc.; but the inf. is often omitted, Ζεὺς δύναται ἅπαντα [sc. ποιεῖν] Od.; so also, μέγα δυνάμενος very powerful, mighty, id. Od.; οἱ δυνάμενοι men of power, Eur., Thuc.; δυνάμενος παρά τινι having influence with him, Hdt., etc.

to be able, i. e. to dare or bear to do a thing, οὐδὲ ποιήσειν δύναται Od.; οὐκέτι ἐδύνατο βιοτεύειν Thuc.

with ὡς and a Sup., ὡς ἐδύναντο ἀδηλότατα as secretly as they could, id. Thuc.; ὡς δύναμαι μάλιστα as much as I possibly can, Plat.; or simply ὡς ἐδύνατο in the best way he could, Xen.

to pass for, i. e.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PNO-3P — Verb · present · no voice stated · optative · third person · plural
present no voice stated optative — an action in progress.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PNO-3P Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: middle or passive depoNent Mood: Optative Person: third Number: Plural

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

a'-b'-l: The Greek dunamai, "to have power," may refer either to inherent strength, or to the absence of in external obstacles, or to what may be allowable or permitted. The Greek ischuo, as in Lu 13:24; Joh 21:6, refers always to the first of the above meanings. The use of the word as an adjective the King James Version of 2Co 3:6, is misleading, and has been properly changed in the Revised Version (British and American) into "sufficient as ministers," i.e. "hath fitted us to be ministers."

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
38%able
able38% · 78×you are able12% · 24×being able10% · 21×he is able5% · 10×you able3% · 7×be able3% · 7×will be able3% · 6×they were able3% · 6×other renderings23% · 48×

207 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 33 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 209 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
οὐNeg
καίand, even, also,σύὅτιthat, since, bec
μήNeg
καίand, even, also,ἸησοῦςJesusὥστεso that, therefo
οὐδείςno one, none, nothin
καίand, even, also,οὐκέτιNegἐν
Article the
πρόςμᾶλλονmore, ratherοὐρανόςthe sky, the hea
πῶς
αὐτόςλέγωI say, speakDisj
δύναμαιthey would be able209×
what comes after →
Article the
υἱόςa son, descendenθεόςGod, a godπροσέρχομαιI come near, con
αὐτός
θεραπεύωI care for, atteμηδέNegδέωI bind
σῴζωI save, heal
βασιλεύςa king, ruler, eαὐτόςArticle the
ἔρχομαιI come, go
πρόςκαίand, even, also,
ἐγώ
καθαρίζωI make cleanποιέωI do, makeνῦνnow, already, at

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceδύναμαι · 209× in the New Testament
John Mark Matthew Luke Acts 1 Corinthians Revelation Hebrews James Ephesians Romans 1 Timothy

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament19 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 159 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 21c. AD 40

οὗ χάριν τῆς ἀρίστης αὑτοῦ φύσεως οὐκ ἐφθόνησεν οὐσίᾳ μηδὲν ἐξ αὑτῆς ἐχούσῃ καλόν, δυναμένῃ δὲ πάντα γίνεσθαι.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.215c. AD 75–95

Σάρρα δὲ γεννηθέντα τὸν Ἰσμαῆλον ἐκ τῆς δούλης αὐτῆς Ἀγάρης τὸ μὲν πρῶτον ἔστεργεν οὐδὲν ἀπολείπουσα τῆς πρὸς ἴδιον υἱὸν εὐνοίας, ἐτρέφετο γὰρ ἐπὶ τῇ τῆς ἡγεμονίας διαδοχῇ, τεκοῦσα δʼ αὐτὴ τὸν Ἴσακον οὐκ ἠξίου παρατρέφεσθαι τούτῳ τὸν Ἰσμαῆλον ὄντα…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 4.1c. AD 100

Δεῖ οὖν ἡμᾶς περὶ τῶν ἐνεστώτων ἐπιπολὺ ἐραυνῶντας ἐκζητεῖν τὰ δυνάμενα ἡμᾶς σώζειν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Edg. $1Syrien253 BC

τε ἐπιμελόμενος ἵνα ὑγιαίνηις καὶ ἡμῖν γράφων ἐάν τί σοι βούληι γίνεσθαι ὧν ἡμεῖς δυνάμεθα. καλῶς δʼ ἂν ποιήσαις ἀγοράσας ἡμῖν ἵνα ὡς ἂν παραγενώμεθα ἔχωμεν μέλιτος τοῦ βελτίστου

P.Cair. Zen. 3 59330Philadelphia? (Arsinoites)249 BC

φόρωι τοῦ λζ ἔτους, συνφωνήσας Ἡρακλείδης μετὰ Θοτέως αὐτοὶ ἄνευ ἡμῶν διελογίσαντο καὶ οὐ δυνάμεθα παρακολουθῆσαι τί πεποιήκασιν ἕως τοῦ νῦν, οὐδὲ αἰτούμενοι τὸν λόγον ἐτόλμησαν ἡμῖν δοῦναι. καὶ

τι καταπεφύτευκεν ἀμπέλωι, κατεγνωκὼς τῶι γυναῖκας ἡμᾶς εἶναι καὶ ἑτέρωι τόπωι κατοικούσας μὴ εὐχερῶς δύνασθαι ἐπιβαλεῖν ἐπὶ τὴν σημαινομένην κτῆσιν. Διὸ καταπεφευγυῖαι ἐπὶ σὲ, ἀξιοῦμεν, ἐὰν φαίνηται, μεταπεμψάμενον αὐτὸν

Unsuitable now the harbor being to winter in the majority reached a decision to set sail from there, if somehow they would be able having arrived at Phoenix to winter [there] — a harbor <the> of Crete looking toward [the] southwest and toward [the] northwest.
καταντήσαντεςkatantaō having arrived G2658 Verb · aorist · active · participle · nominative · plural · masculine
13× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To come to means to arrive at a place or meet someone, like in Acts 16:1 where Paul arrives in Derbe. It can also mean to attain or reach something, as in 1 Corinthians 10:11.
Tyndale gloss
to come to
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word καταντάω (*katantao*) means to come to or arrive at something, whether literally or metaphorically. It is formed from the prefix κατ- and a root meaning to reach. The New Testament uses it in contexts such as reaching a destination (Acts 16:1) and attaining a goal (Philippians 3:11). The lexicons do not show significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

† κατ-αντάω, -ῶ,

[in LXX: II Ki 3:29 (חוּל), II Mac 4:21, 24, 44 6:14*;]

to come to, arrive at: seq. εἰς, c. acc. loc., Ac 16:1 18:19, 24 21:7 25:13 (v. M, Pr., 132) 27:12 28:13; seq. ἀντικρύ, c. gen., Ac 20:15. Metaph., seq. εἰς, c. acc. pers., I Co 10:11 14:36; id. c. acc. rei, to attain to: Ac 26:7, Eph 4:13, Phl 3:11.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

κατ-αντάω, -@: 1 aor. κατήντησα; pi. κατήντηκα (1 Co. x.11LTTr WH); to come to, arrive at; a. prop.: foll. by εἰς w. ace. of place, Acts xvi. 1; xviii. 19, 24; xxi. 7; xxv.13; xxvil.12; xxviii. 13, (2 Macc. iv. 44); ἀντικρύ τινος, to a place over against, opposite another, Acts xx. 15; els τινα τὰ τέλη τῶν αἰώνων κατήντηκεν, 1. 6. whose lifetime occurs at the ends of the ages, 1 Co. x. 11. b. metaph. εἴς τι, like the Lat. ad aliquid pervenio, i. 6. to attain to a thing: Acts xxvi. 7; Eph. iv. 13; Phil. iii. 11; καταντᾷ τι εἴς twa, to one, that he may become partaker of it, 1 Co. xiv. 36. (Polyb., Diod.; eccl. writ.)

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

καταντάω. Karayray eis in the legal sense of property “" descending to” an heir is very common, e.g. BGU IV. 11694 (B.c. το) ἧσπερ μετηλλαχυίας κατήντηκεν is αὐτοὺς τὰ ταύτης, P Oxy II. 274! (A.D. 89-97) τὰ δὲ προκείμενα αὐτοῦ πατρικ[ὰ] . . κατήντ(ησεν) εἰς αἰὐτὸν) μετὰ τὴν τ[ο]ῦ πατ(ρὸς) τελευτήν, BGU IIT. οδ914 (ii/A.D.) εἰς τὸν συνηγορούμενον κατήντηκεν ἡ κτηνοτίρ]οφία. [π᾿ BGU I. 326: 15,18 (a.p. 194) καταντῆσαι πρός τινα occurs twice in the same sense. This technical meaning seems very appropriate in 1 Cor 101* ἡμῶν, εἰς ods τὰ τέλη τῶν αἰώνων κατήντηκεν, on which Prof. Findlay’s unconscious comment is—‘‘ The Church is the Aezr of the spiritual training of mankind” (G7 ad/.). [Dr. Rendel Harris suggests that in this case τὰ τέλη means “the revenues” of the ages]. The Tennysonian parallel ““T, the heir of all the ages” suggests itself at once. In 1 Cor 14% ἢ εἰς ὑμᾶς μόνους…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καταντάω (katantaō) — to come to.

καταντ-άω,

come down to, arrive, εἰς τὰ βασίλεια, ἐπὶ κοίτην, [Refs 1st c.BC+]

2. in a speech or narrative, come to, arrive at a point, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; have recourse to, ἐπὶ [τὴν ἡδονήν] [Refs 4th c.BC+] O.

3. of persons, κ. εἰς ἑαυτούς attack, commence hostilities against each other, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]

4. of events, come upon, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; κ. εἴς τινα affect him, [Refs 1st c.BC+].83 W.; of blood-guiltiness, fall, [Refs].

4. b turn out, result, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; so of numbers, to be reduced, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

5. of an inheritance, κ. εἴς τινα fall to one's share, [NT+2nd c.AD+]

II. transitive, make to come back, bring back, τινα [Refs 4th c.AD+] (so intransitive in perfect, return, [Refs 1st c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

καταντάω

katantao

from 2596 and a derivative of 473; to meet against, i.e. arrive at

(literally or figuratively):--attain, come.

see GREEK for 2596

see GREEK for 473

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καταντάω

v.

I come down, arrive at, reach

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καταντάω katantaō 13x

to come to, arrive at, Acts 16:1; 20:15; of an epoch, to come upon, 1 Cor. 10:11; met. to reach, attain to, Acts 26:7

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-AAP-NPM — Verb · aorist · active · participle · nominative · plural · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-AAP-NPM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
15%we arrived
we arrived15% · 2×came down15% · 2×he came8% · 1×they came8% · 1×came8% · 1×attain8% · 1×having arrived8% · 1×has come8% · 1×other renderings23% · 3×

13 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 11 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 13 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
λόγιοςeloquent
ἀνήρa male human bei
ἔπειμιthe next day
Article the
ΤύροςTyre
ἀπό
ΒερνίκηBernice
καίand, even, also,
ἐλπίζωI hope, hope for, ex
λατρεύωI serve, worship
καταντάωhaving arrived13×
what comes after →
εἰς
ἜφεσοςEphesusΠτολεμαΐςPtolemaisΚαισάρειαCaesarea
δέbut, on the other ha
καίand, even, also,εἰς
ἄντικρυςright opposite, over
ΧίοςChios
περί
ὅς
Article the
πᾶςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαταντάω · 13× in the New Testament
Acts 1 Corinthians Ephesians Philippians
Across the New Testament4 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Clement of Rome Josephus Polycarp
JosephusThe Jewish War 2.544c. AD 75–95

παρʼ ὅλην δὲ τὴν ὁδὸν παιόμενοι καὶ τῆς φάλαγγος ἐκσειόμενοι κατέπιπτον, μέχρι πολλῶν διαφθαρέντων, ἐν οἷς ἦν Πρῖσκος μὲν στρατάρχης τάγματος ἕκτου, Λογγῖνος δὲ χιλίαρχος, ἔπαρχος δὲ ἴλης Αἰμίλιος Ἰούκουνδος ὄνομα, μόλις εἰς Γαβαὼν κατήντησαν ἐπὶ τὸ…

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 6.2c. AD 96

διὰ ζῆλος διωχθεῖσαι γυναῖκες Δαναΐδες καὶ Δίρκαι, αἰκίσματα δεινὰ καὶ ἀνόσια παθοῦσαι, ἐπὶ τὸν τῆς πίστεως βέβαιον δρόμον κατήντησαν καὶ ἔλαβον γέρας γενναῖον αἱ ἀσθενεῖς τῷ σώματι.

PolycarpPolycarp to the Philippians 1.2c. AD 110

καὶ ὅτι ἡ βεβαία τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν ῥίζα, ἐξ ἀρχαίων καταγγελλομένη χρόνων, μέχρι νῦν διαμένει καὶ καρποφορεῖ εἰς τὸν κύριον ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦν Χριστόν, ὃς ὑπέμεινεν ὑπὲρ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ἡμῶν ἕως θανάτου καταντῆσαι, ὃν ἤγειρεν ὁ θεός, λύσας τὰς ὠδῖνας τοῦ ᾅδου:

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. BC 1st c. AD 4th c. AD
BGU 4 1060Busiris (Herakleopolites)15 BC

βασιλικὸν ἐκφόρια προσδιαληφθέντος περὶ αὐτοῦ ἁρμοζόντως. εὐτύχει γράψον Θέωνι ἀρχεφόδῳ τὸν ἀφωρικότα τὸ ἔδαφος καταντῆσαι ἔτους ιϛ Φαμενὼθ θ

BGU 4 1169Alexandria12 BC–11 BC

Νώχεος κατὰ συνχώρησιν διὰ τοῦ αὐτοῦ κριτηρίου τῷ ἑβδόμῳ ἔτει Καίσαρος Ἁθύρ, ἧσπερ μετηλλαχυίας κατήντηκεν εἰς αὐτοὺς τὰ ταύτης, καὶ εἶναι ἄκυρον τὴν δηλουμένην συνχώρησιν καὶ ἃς ἂν ὑστέρας

Ἡρακλείδου μερίδος τοῦ Ἀρσινοΐτου νομοῦ· ἀπὸ τῶν ἔμπροσθεν πολυανδρούντων ἐν ταῖς προκειμέναις κώμαις νυνὶ κατήντησαν εἰς ὀλίγους διὰ τὸ τοὺς μὲν ἀνακεχωρηκέναι ἀπόρους, τοὺς δὲ τετελευτηκέναι μὴ ἔχοντας ἀγχιστεῖς

Unsuitable now the harbor being to winter in the majority reached a decision to set sail from there, if somehow they would be able having arrived at Phoenix to winter [there] — a harbor <the> of Crete looking toward [the] southwest and toward [the] northwest.
εἰςeis at G1519 Preposition
1,766× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means toward or into, indicating direction or purpose, as seen in Matthew 8:23 and Mark 1:45. It can also imply a sense of movement or action. The KJV translates it in various ways.
Tyndale gloss
toward
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

εἰς is a preposition meaning 'into' or 'to,' used with the accusative case. It indicates direction, entrance, or limit, applicable to place, time, and figurative purposes. The New Testament frequently employs it to express movement toward locations or states, as seen in passages like Matthew 8:23. It can also denote relationships or results, such as 'for' or 'among.'

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

εἰς,

prep. c. acc.,

expressing entrance, direction, limit, into, unto, to, upon, towards, for, among (Lat. in, c. acc.).

Of place.

After verbs of motion;

of entrance into: Mt 8:23 9:7, Mk 1:45, Lk 2:15 8:31, al.;

of approach, to or towards: Mk 11:1, Lk 6:8 19:28, Jo 11:31 21:6, al.;

before pl. and collective nouns, among: Mk 4:7 8:19, 20, Lk 11:49, Jo 21:23, al.;

Of a limit reached, unto, on, upon: Mt 8:18, 21:1, Mk…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

εἰς, a Prep. governing the Accusative, and denoting entrance into, or direction and limit: into, to, towards, for, among. It is used A. Property I. of Place, after verbs of going, coming, sailing, flying, falling, living, leading, carrying, throwing, sending, etc. ; 1. of a place entered, or of entrance into a place, into; and 8. it stands before nouns designating an open place, a hollow thing, or one in which an object can be hidden: as εἰς (τὴν) πόλιν, Mt. xxvi. 18; xxviii. 11; Mk. i. 45, and often; εἰς r. οἶκον, Mt. ix. 7; συναγωγήν, Acts xvii. 10; πλοῖον, Mt. viii. 23; Jn. vi. 17; Acts xxi. 6; θάλασσαν, Mt. xvii. 27; ἄβυσσον, Lk. viii. 31; οὐρανόν, Lk. ii. 15; κόσμον, In. 1. 9; iii. 19, ete.; τὰ ἴδια, Jn. i. 11; xvi. 32; Acts xxi. 6; ἀποθήκην, Mt. iii. 12; εἰς ra ὦτα, Lk. i. 44; εἰς τὰς ζώνας or ζώνην, Mt. x. 9; Mk. vi. 8, etc.; εἰς ἀέρα, 1 Co. xiv. 9; eis πῦρ, Mk. ix. 22, ete.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

εἰς ἁλιέων εἰς ᾿Αλεξάνδριί[αν (P Oxy II. 2943 = Selections, Ρ- 34): see further Pro/eg. pp. 234 f., 245. For εἰς in the wide sense in which we use ‘‘for” we may cite such passages as P Lille I. 261 (iii/B.c.) ἔγραψάς μοι περὶ τῆς εἰς THY σησαμείαν γῆς, 20." ἕως ἂν] μάθωμεν περὶ τῶν κ[εχρ]ηματισμένων εἰς τὸν νομόν, P Petr II. 11 (1)" (mid. iii/B.c.) (= Witkowski*, p. 8) ἀπὸ τούτου τὸ μὲν ἥμυσυ εἰς τὰ δέοντα ὑπελιπόμην, τὸ δὲ λοιπὸν εἰς τὸ δάνειον κατέβαλον, P Lond 43? (ii/B.c.) (=I. p. 48, Witkowski’, p- 110) ἕξεις ἐφόδιον εἰς τὸ γῆρας, P Tebt I. 577 (8.6. 118) προστε]τάχασι δὲ καὶ τὰ els τὴν ταφὴν τοῦ “Amos, P Oxy I. 379 (A.D. 149) (= Selections, p. 49) ἐγένετο ἐνθάδε ἡ τροφεῖτις εἰς υἱὸν tod ΤΠεσούριος, ‘‘there was concluded here the nursing-contract for the son of Pesouris”; and the recurring formulae in a private account of ς. A.D. 15 τό. 1V. 736° θρύων εἰς τοὺς ἄρτους (ὀβολοὶ δύο)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

εἰς (eis) — toward.

ἐν εἰς

or ἐς, PREP. WITH ACC. ONLY:—both forms are found in [Refs 8th c.BC+], Ionic dialect poets, and early metrical Inscrr.; ἐς is best attested in [Refs 5th c.BC+], and is found in nearly all early Ionic dialect Inscrr. (except [Refs 5th c.BC+]; and usually in Attic dialect Prose (except [Refs 5th c.BC+] is used before vowels for the sake of meter; ἐς was retained in the phrases ἐς κόρακας (whence the Verb σκορακίζω), ἐς μακαρίαν. Aeolic dialect poets have εἰς before vowels, ἐς before consonants, and this is given as the rule in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; compare ἐν, ἰν. The diphthong is genuine in Aeolic dialect εἰς, but spurious in Attic dialect-Ionic dialect) Radical sense into, and then more loosely, to:

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

εἰς

eis

a primary preposition; to or into (indicating the point reached or

entered), of place, time, or (figuratively) purpose (result, etc.);

also in adverbial phrases:--(abundant-)ly, against, among, as, at,

(back-)ward, before, by, concerning, + continual, + far more

exceeding, for (intent, purpose), fore,

+ forth, in (among, at, unto, -so much that, -to), to the

intent that, + of one mind, + never, of, (up-)on, + perish, + set at

one again, (so) that, therefore(-unto), throughout, til, to (be, the

end, -ward), (here-)until(-to), ...ward, (where-)fore, with. Often

used in composition with the same general import, but only with verbs

(etc.) expressing motion (literally or figuratively).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

εἰς

Prep.

into, in, among, till, for

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

εἰς

into, to c. acc.

PREP. WITH ACC. ONLY. Radical sense, into, and then to:

OF PLACE, the commonest usage, εἰς ἅλα into or to the sea, Hom., etc.:—properly opposed to ἐκ, ἐς σφυρὸν ἐκ πτέρνης from head to foot, Il.; εἰς ἔτος ἐξ ἔτεος from year to year, Theocr.:—then, with all Verbs implying motion or direction, ἰδεῖν εἰς οὐρανόν Il.; εἰς ὦπα ἰδέσθαι to look in the face, id. Il.:—in Hom. and Hdt. also c. acc. pers., where the attic use ὡς, πρός, παρά.

with Verbs which express rest in a place, when a previous motion into or to it is implied, ἐς μέγαρον κατέθηκε, i. e. he brought it into the house, and put it there, Od.; παρεῖναι ἐς τόπον to go to a place and be there, Hdt.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
33%into
into33% · 595×to32% · 570×for10% · 185×in9% · 160×unto4% · 69×toward2% · 44×other renderings8% · 145×other renderings2% · 29×

1,797 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 37 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial95%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,766 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
βάλλωI cast, throw, rεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inδέbut, on the othe
εἰσέρχομαιI go in, come in, en
καίand, even, also,μήNegαὐτός
ἔρχομαιI come, go
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςοὗτος
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςἐκκόπτωI cut out, cut oπόλιςa city
ἐγώ
εἰμίI am, existκαίand, even, also,δίδωμιI offer, give
εἰςat1766×
what comes after →
Article the
αἰώνan age, a cycle οἶκοςa house, househoοὐρανόςthe sky, the hea
αὐτός
Article theκαίand, even, also,οὗτος
ἹεροσόλυμαJerusalem
καίand, even, also,εἰςὅτιthat, since, bec
ὅς
καίand, even, also,δέbut, on the otheἄνDisj
σύ
καίand, even, also,μήNegἐν

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceεἰς · 1,766× in the New Testament
Acts Luke Matthew John Mark Romans Revelation 2 Corinthians Hebrews 1 Peter 1 Corinthians Ephesians

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 9c. AD 40

τὸ δὲ παθητὸν ἄψυχον καὶ ἀκίνητον ἐξ ἑαυτοῦ, κινηθὲν δὲ καὶ σχηματισθὲν καὶ ψυχωθὲν ὑπὸ τοῦ νοῦ μετέβαλεν εἰς τὸ τελειότατον ἔργον, τόνδε τὸν κόσμον·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅτι λιμοῦ τὴν Χαναναίαν καταλαβόντος εἰς Αἴγυπτον ἀπῆρε καὶ διατρίψας ἐν αὐτῇ τινα χρόνον ὑπέστρεψεν ὀπίσω.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD 2nd c. BC
P.Grenf. 2 33Pathyris101 BC

καὶ τοῖς μετόχοις γῆς σιτοφόρου λεγομένης Νεχθαραῦτι θεοῦ μεγάλου παρὰ τῶν ἱερέων ἐτῶν δέκα εἰς τὰ ἐνλιπόντα αὐτῷ ἑτέρων , τεσσάρων εἰς συμπλήρωσιν ἐτῶν πέντε , ὥστε γεωργῆσαι ἧς

BGU 3 999Pathyris100 BC

καὶ ἀπηλιώτου τὸ λοιπὸν τῆς Εὐνόου οἰκίας λιβὸς ῥύμη ἐφ ᾧ ἀνοίξει τὴν θύραν εἰς τὴν Ὀρσηοῦς οἰκίαν ἢ οἳ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντοθεν. ἐπρίατο Πετεσοῦχος Νεχθανούπιος ὡς ἐτῶν

P.Adl. 17Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)100 BC

ος, βορρᾶ γῆ Σχώτου τοῦ Τρύφωνος, ἀπηλιώτου τὸ λοιπὸν τῆς γῆς, λιβὸς ἡ φέρουσα εἰς τὸ Κρόνειον ὁδός, ἢ οἳ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντοθεν. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου Πέρσης τῆς

Unsuitable now the harbor being to winter in the majority reached a decision to set sail from there, if somehow they would be able having arrived at Phoenix to winter [there] — a harbor <the> of Crete looking toward [the] southwest and toward [the] northwest.
ΦοίνικαPhoinix Phoenix G5405 Noun · accusative · singular · masculine
1× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Phoenice was a city in Crete, mentioned in Acts 27:12. It was an important place for ships to stop and refuel. The city is still known today for its historic significance.
Amplified meaning
Phoenice, a city in Crete
Tyndale gloss
Phoenix
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

Φοῖνιξ (Phoinix) primarily refers to a date-palm tree or its fruit, particularly dates, as noted in John 12:13. It can also denote a city in Crete, mentioned in Acts 27:12. The word is built from the root associated with palm trees, and while some entries focus on its botanical aspect, others highlight its geographical significance.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

φοῖνιξ (on the accent, v. Bl., § 4, 2; WM, § 6, lc), -ικος, ὁ,

[in LXX for תָּמָר,תֹּמֶר,תִּמֹּרָה;]

the date-palm, palm: τὰ βαΐα τῶν φ., Jo 12:13; of palm branches, φοίνικες (as Arist., II Mac 10:7, al.), Re 7:9.†

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

φοῖνιξ, “a palm tree” (Jn 121%), or the fruit of a palm tree “dates”: cf. P Hal I. 7° (B.c. 232) αἴτησον 8... ὥστε eis [ξέϊνια φοίνικας, P Amh II. 318 (B.c. 112) τόπους περιειλημμένους els φυτείαν φοινίκων, ‘‘ pieces of land which had been enclosed for the purpose of growing palms” (Edd.), and so 15, BGU IV. 1095% (A.D. 57) περὶ δὲ τοῦ φοίνικος παλαιὸν οὐχ εὕραμεν, ‘as regards the dates, we did not find any old,” P Ryl II. 172!" (a.D. 208) φοίνικος μονοξύλου, ‘‘dates on single stems” (Edd.), and P Flor I. 50? (division of property—A.b. 268) σὺν τοῖς ἐ[νοῦσι φοί]νιξι kal φυτοῖς. Related words are φοινικών, “ἃ palm garden”’ (P Tebt II. 343°—ii/A.D.), φοινίκινος, ‘‘made of…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

Φοῖνιξ (Phoinix) — Phoenix.

φοῖνιξ, -ικος, ο, ἡ

Phænix, a city of Crete: Act.27:12.†

(From Abbott-Smith. LSJ has no entry)

Strong's Greek Dictionary

φοῖνιξ

Phoinix

probably the same as 5404; Phoenix, a place in Crete:--Phenice.

see GREEK for 5404

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

Φοῖνιξ, ικός, ἡ

n.m.

Phoenix

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

Φοῖνιξ Phoinix 1x

Phoenix, Phoenice, a city, with a harbor, on the southeast coast of Crete, Acts 27:12*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

Φοῖνιξ Φοῖνιξ, ι_κος, a Phoenician, Hom.

fem., Φοίνισσα γυνή Od., Eur.; χθών, νῆσος Eur.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-ASM — Noun · accusative · singular · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

fe'-niks (Phoinix; the King James Version Phenice): A harbor in Crete (Ac 27:12). The Alexandrian corn ship carrying Paul and the author of Acts, after it left Myra in Lycia, was prevented by adverse winds from holding a straight course to Italy, and sailed under the lee of Crete, off the promontory of Salmone (kata Salmonen). The ship was then able to make her way along the South shore of Crete to a harbor called Fair Havens (Kaloi Limenes), near a city Lasea (Lasaia). Thence, in spite of Paul's advice to winter in Fair Havens, it was decided to sail to Phoenix (eis Phoinika, limena tes Kretes) bleponta kata liba kai kata choron, a description which has been translated in two ways:

(1) "looking toward the Southwest wind and toward the Northwest wind, i.e. looking Southwest and Northwest";

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
100%phoenix
phoenix100% · 1×

1 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

ConcordanceΦοῖνιξ · 1× in the New Testament
Acts
Across the New Testament1 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 3.74c. AD 40

τεύξῃ δὲ τῶν ἄθλων, ἐὰν γυνή σου γένηται ἡ τοῦ Ἰούδα νύμφη Θάμαρ, ἥτις ἑρμηνεύεται φοῖνιξ, σύμβολον νίκης·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 3.183c. AD 75–95

ἥ τε γὰρ βύσσος τὴν γῆν ἀποσημαίνειν ἔοικε διὰ τὸ ἐξ αὐτῆς ἀνεῖσθαι τὸ λίνον, ἥ τε πορφύρα τὴν θάλασσαν τῷ πεφοινῖχθαι τῶν ἰχθύων τῷ αἵματι, τὸν δὲ ἀέρα βούλεται δηλοῦν ὁ ὑάκινθος, καὶ ὁ φοῖνιξ δʼ ἂν εἴη τεκμήριον τοῦ πυρός.

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 25.2c. AD 96

ὄρνεον γάρ ἐστιν, ὃ προσονομάζεται φοῖνιξ: τοῦτο μονογενὲς ὑπάρχον ζῇ ἔτη πεντακόσια, γενόμενόν τε ἤδη πρὸς ἀπόλυσιν τοῦ ἀποθανεῖν αὐτό, σηκὸν ἑαυτῷ ποιεῖ ἐκ λιβάνου καὶ σμύρνης καὶ τῶν λοιπῶν ἀρωμάτων, εἰς ὃν πληρωθέντος τοῦ χρόνου εἰσέρχεται καὶ…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC undated 7th c. AD
O.Claud. 4 731Mons ClaudianusAD 98–AD 117

φαρμαξάριοι Εὐτύχῃ Κόπιτος Φοῖνιξ ἀκισκλάριοι Πρόκλος ὁ καὶ Ἑρμίας Ἀνουβᾶς τηρητὴς σιδηρίων Οὐαλέρις Τερτυλᾶς

O.Claud. 4 733Mons ClaudianusAD 98–AD 117

Λουτῆρι Φοῖνιξ Κούπιτος Ἀμμώνις Φαυστίλλος πραισιδίῳ Σεραπίων Καπελᾶ Χρύσης Τρύφων Λούκις Ἐπεὶφ ζ

P.Yadin 1 21Maoza (Arabia)AD 130

Σαμμοῦος Μαναήου τῆς αὐτῆς Μαωζας. καὶ εἴ τι ἂν περισσευθῇ εἰς τοὺς προγεγραμμένους κήπους, φοίνικα λήψομαι εἰς ἐμαυτὸν ἀντὶ τῶν ἐμῶν κόπων καὶ ἀναλωμάτων. ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀπαρτίσω σοι

Unsuitable now the harbor being to winter in the majority reached a decision to set sail from there, if somehow they would be able having arrived at Phoenix to winter [there] — a harbor <the> of Crete looking toward [the] southwest and toward [the] northwest.
παραχειμάσαιparacheimazō to winter [there] — G3914 Verb · aorist · active · infinitive
4× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To winter means to stay in a place over the cold or rainy season. In Acts 27:12 and 28:11, Paul and his companions wintered in different cities during their travels.
Amplified meaning
to spend the winter season
Tyndale gloss
to winter
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word παραχειμάζω (transliterated as *paracheimazo*) means to winter or spend the winter at a place. It is formed from the prefix παρα- and the root χειμάζω. The New Testament uses it in several passages, including Acts and Corinthians, to describe staying in a location during the rainy season.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

* παρα-χειμάζω,

to winter at a place: seq. εἰς, Ac 27:12; ἐν, Ac 28:11; πρὸς ὑμᾶς, I Co 16:6; ἐκεῖ, Tit 3:12.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

παραχειμάζω: fut. παραχειμάσω; 1 aor. inf. mapayetpaca; pf. ptep. παρακεχειμακώς ; to winter, pass the winter, with one or ata place: Acts xxvii. 12; 1 Co. xvi. 6; ἐν τῇ νήσῳ, Acts xxviii. 11; ἐκεῖ, Tit. iii. 12. (Dem. p. 909, 15; Polyb. 2, 64,1; Diod. 19, 34; Plut. Sertor. 3; Dio Cass. 40, 4.)

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

παραχειμάζω, ‘spend the winter” (Ac 2713, 2811, a/.) : cf. OG/S 5443° (ii/A.D.) ἀποδεξάμεν[όν] τε στρατεύματα τὰ παραχειμάσαίν]τα ἐν τῇ πόλει.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

παραχειμάζω (paracheimazō) — to winter.

παραχειμ-άζω,

perfect participle -κεχειμακώς[NT]:—winter at a place, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

παραχειμάζω

paracheimazo

from 3844 and 5492; to winter near, i.e. stay with over the rainy

season:--winter.

see GREEK for 3844

see GREEK for 5492

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

παραχειμάζω

v.

I pass the winter

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

παραχειμάζω paracheimazō 4x

to winter, spend the winter, Acts 27:12; 28:11; 1 Cor. 16:6; Tit. 3:12*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

παραχειμάζω perf. part. -κεχειμακώς to winter in or at a place, Dem., etc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-AAN — Verb · aorist · active · infinitive
aorist active infinitive — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-AAN Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: iNfinitive TVM equivalent: G5658

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
50%winter
winter50% · 2×having wintered25% · 1×i will winter25% · 1×

4 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 4 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ΦοῖνιξPhoenix
εἰς
πλοῖονa ship, vessel
ἐν
καίand, even, also, nam
Disj
κρίνωI judge, decide, thi
γάρfor
παραχειμάζωto winter [there] —
what comes after →
λιμήνa harbor, port
Article the
ἐν
Article the
ἵναin order that, so th
σύ

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπαραχειμάζω · 4× in the New Testament
Acts 1 Corinthians Titus
Across the New Testament3 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Unsuitable now the harbor being to winter in the majority reached a decision to set sail from there, if somehow they would be able having arrived at Phoenix to winter [there] — a harbor <the> of Crete looking toward [the] southwest and toward [the] northwest.
λιμέναlimēn a harbor G3040 Noun · accusative · singular · masculine
3× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Havens refer to a harbor or safe place, as seen in Acts 27:8. It involves a protected area for ships to dock, often used as a refuge. This term is used to describe various locations in the Bible.
Amplified meaning
a safe place
Tyndale gloss
Havens
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

λιμήν is a masculine noun meaning 'harbor' or 'haven.' It can refer to a physical port or a metaphorical place of refuge. The New Testament uses it in Acts 27:8, 12, where it describes locations for ships. The lexicons agree on its primary meaning but also note its broader metaphorical uses, such as a retreat or refuge.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

λιμήν, -ένος, ὁ,

[in LXX: Ps 106 (107):30 (מָחוֹז), Ps 106 (107):35, I Es 5:55, I, II, IV Mac7*;]

a harbour, haven: Ac 27:8, 12 (cf. Καλοὶ Λιμένες).†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

λιμήν, -ένος, ὁ, [allied with λίμνη, q. v.; fr. Hom. down], a harbor, haven: Acts xxvii. 8, 12; see καλοὶ λιμένες, p. 322%.

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

λιμήν. P Petr II. 4511: 19 (B.c 246) ὁ ἐν Σελευκεί[αι λ]ιμήν, P Amh 11. 1161 (A.D. 178) τετέλίεσται) . . « λιμένος Μέμφεως, ‘© paid the tax for the harbour of Memphis.”’

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

λιμήν (limēn) — Havens.

λῐμήν, ένσς, ὁ,

harbour, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Κανθάρου λ. a dockyard in the Piraeus, with a pun on κάνθαρος just above, [Refs 8th c.BC+] havens of refuge from the sea, [Refs 8th c.BC+]

II. metaphorically, haven, retreat, refuge, [Refs 6th c.BC+]; ἑταιρείας λ. a haven of friendship, [Refs 5th c.BC+] from ills, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II.2. gathering-place, receptacle, πλούτου λ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ἅιδου λ. harbour of death, [Refs]; ξείνων αἰδοῖοι λιμένες [Refs 5th c.BC+]; βοῆς τῆς σῆς ποῖος οὐκ ἔσται λ.; what place shall not harbour (i.e. receive) thy cry? [Refs 5th c.BC+]

III. ={ἀγορά} in Thessaly and Paphos, [Refs 1st c.AD+]

IV. the source of birth, womb, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

λιμήν

limen

apparently a primary word; a harbor:--haven. Compare 2568.

see GREEK for 2568

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

λιμήν, ένος, ὁ

n.m.

a harbor, port

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

λιμήν limēn 3x

a port, haven, harbor, Καλὰ Λιμένες, Acts 27:8, 12*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

λιμήν λι^μήν, ένος, ὁ, a harbour, haven, creek, whereas ὅρμος is properly the inner part of the harbour, the landing-place, Hom., etc.; in pl., Od., Soph., etc.; —also c. gen. objecti, λιμένες θαλάσσης havens of refuge from the sea, Od.

metaph. a haven, retreat, refuge, Theogn.; ἑταιρείας λ. a haven of friendship, Soph.; λ. τῶν ἐμῶν βουλευμάτων Eur.; c. gen. objecti, χείματος λ. a harbour of refuge from the storm, id. Eur.

a place of resort, receptacle, πλούτου λ. Aesch.; παντὸς οἰωνοῦ λ. Soph.; in O. T. 420, the sense seems to be—how will Cithaeron not be filled with thy cries (λιμὴν ἔσται τῆς σῆς βοῆς) ? how will it not reecho them?

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-ASM — Noun · accusative · singular · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
67%harbor
harbor67% · 2×havens33% · 1×

3 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
predicate33%subject33%adverbial33%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 3 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καλόςbeautiful, good, wor
καλέωI call, invite,
Article the
δέbut, on the othe
παραχειμάζωI pass the winter
ΦοῖνιξPhoenix
λιμήνa harbor
what comes after →
ὅς
ἐγγύςnear
ὑπάρχωI am, exist, am in p
πρός
Article the
ΚρήτηCrete

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceλιμήν · 3× in the New Testament
Acts
Across the New Testament1 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Sacrifices of Abel and Cain 90c. AD 40

οὐχ ἵνα σάλον καὶ τροπὴν καὶ κλύδωνα ὧδε κἀκεῖσε φορούμενος ἀστάτως ὑπομένῃς, ἀλλ’ ἵνα τοῦ σάλου παυσάμενος αἰθρίαν καὶ γαλήνην ἀγάγῃς καὶ ὥσπερ εἰς ὑπόδρομον ἢ ὕφορμον ἢ ναυλοχώτατον λιμένα

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 11.78c. AD 75–95

ἤρξαντο δὲ καὶ τῆς οἰκοδομίας τοῦ ναοῦ πολλὰ τοῖς τε λατόμοις καὶ τέκτοσι χρήματα δόντες καὶ τὰ πρὸς τροφὴν τῶν εἰσαγομένων, τοῖς τε Σιδωνίοις ἡδὺ καὶ κοῦφον ἦν τά τε κέδρινα κατάγουσιν ἐκ τοῦ Λιβάνου ξύλα δήσασιν αὐτὰ καὶ σχεδίαν πηξαμένοις εἰς τὸν…

Ignatius of AntiochThe Letters of Ignatius 6.11.3c. AD 110

ἐφάνη μοι οὖν θεοῦ ἄξιον πρᾶγμα, πέμψαι τινὰ τῶν ὑμετέρων μετ̓ ἐπιστολῆς, ἵνα συνδοξάσῃ τὴν κατὰ θεὸν αὐτοῖς γενομένην εὐδίαν, καὶ ὅτι λιμένος ἤδη ἐτύγχανον τῇ προσευχῇ ὑμῶν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD
P.Customs 188Soknopaiu Nesos (Arsinoites)AD 59

πάρες διὰ πύλης Νήσου Σοκνοπαίου λιμένος Μέμφεως Στοτοήθι ἐλαίου ὄνον ἕνα μετρητὴν ἕνα ἥμισυ, γίνεται μετρητὴς α 𐅵. ἔτους πέμπτου

P.Aberd. 42 e descr.Philadelphia (Arsinoites)AD 106

πάρες διὰ πύλης Φιλαδελφίας λιμένος Μέμφεως Ἀντωνίῳ … τρισὶ πυροῦ ἀρτάβας δεκαδύο, γίνονται πυροῦ ἀρτάβαι ιβ. ἔτους ἐνάτου Τραιανοῦ

P.Fay. 174 descr.Bakchias (Arsinoites)AD 125

τετελώνηται διὰ πύλης Βακχιάδος λιμένος Μέμφεως Νιννᾶς ἐξάγων φοίνικος ὄνον ἕνα ἀρτάβας τέσσαρας . ἔτους ἐνάτου Τραιανοῦ Ἁδριανοῦ τοῦ

Unsuitable now the harbor being to winter in the majority reached a decision to set sail from there, if somehow they would be able having arrived at Phoenix to winter [there] — a harbor <the> of Crete looking toward [the] southwest and toward [the] northwest.
τῆςho <the> G3588 Article · genitive · singular · feminine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-GSF — Article · genitive · singular · feminine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-GSF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
<the>19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

Unsuitable now the harbor being to winter in the majority reached a decision to set sail from there, if somehow they would be able having arrived at Phoenix to winter [there] — a harbor <the> of Crete looking toward [the] southwest and toward [the] northwest.
ΚρήτηςKrētē of Crete G2914 Noun · genitive · singular · feminine
5× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Crete is an island in the Mediterranean, mentioned in Acts 27 and Titus 1:5. The island was an important stop for the apostle Paul during his travels. It is also where Titus was left to oversee the churches.
Amplified meaning
an island in the Mediterranean
Tyndale gloss
Crete
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The word Κρήτη (i.e., Krete) refers to the island of Crete in the Mediterranean. It appears in several New Testament passages, including Acts 27 and Titus 1. The entries indicate its historical significance, noting its ancient name and references in epic poetry.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

Κρήτη, -ης, ἡ,

Crete: Ac 27:7, 12, 13, 31, Tit 1:5.†

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

Κρήτη (Krētē) — Crete.

Crete , now Candia , [8th/7th c.BC]; epic genitive plural Κρητάων εὐρειάων [8th/7th c.BC] (Middle Liddel)

Strong's Greek Dictionary

Κρήτη

Krete

of uncertain derivation; Crete, an island in the

Mediterranean:--Crete.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

Κρήτη, ης, ἡ

n.f.

Crete

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

Κρήτη Krētē 5x

Crete, a large island in the eastern part of the Mediterranean, Acts 27:7, 12f., 21, Tit. 1:5*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

Κρήτη Κρήτη, ἡ, Crete, now Candia, Hom.; epic gen. pl. Κρητάων εὐρειάων Od.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-GSF — Noun · genitive · singular · feminine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GSF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

kret (Krete, ethnic Kretes, Ac 2:11; Tit 1:12): An island bounding the Aegean Sea on the South. It stretches from 34 degrees 50' to 35 degrees 40' North latitude and from 23 degrees 30' to 26 degrees 20' East long. With Cythera on the North and Carpathos and Rhodos on the Northeast, it forms a continuous bridge between Greece and Asia Minor. The center of the island is formed by a mountain chain rising to a height of 8,193 ft. in Mt. Ida, and fringed with low valleys beside the coast. There are no considerable rivers; the largest, the Metropole, on the South, is a tiny stream, fordable anywhere. An island of considerable extent (156 miles long, and from 7 to 30 miles broad), in several districts very fertile and possessing one or two good harbors, it seems marked out by its…

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Crete

Now called Candia, one of the largest islands in the Meditterranean, about 140 miles long and 35 broad. It was at one time a very prosperous and populous island, having a “hundred cities.” The character of the people is described in Paul’s quotation from “one of their own poets” (Epimenides) in his epistle to Titus: “The Cretans are alway liars, evil beasts, slow bellies” (Titus 1:12). Jews from Crete were in Jerusalem on the day of Pentecost (Acts 2:11). The island was visited by Paul on his voyage to Rome (Acts 27). Here Paul subsequently left Titus (1:5) “to ordain elders.” Some have supposed that it was the original home of the Caphtorim (q.v.) or Philistines.

Smith's Bible Dictionary

the modern Candia. This large island, which closes int he Greek Archipelago on the south, extends through a distance of 140 miles between its extreme points. Though exceedingly bold and mountainous, this island has very fruitful valleys, and in early times it was celebrated for its hundred cities. It seems likely that a very early acquaintances existed between the Cretans and the Jews. Cretans, (Acts 2:11) were among those who were at Jerusalem at the great Pentecost. In [Acts 27:7-12 We have an account of Paul’s shipwreck near this island; and it is evident from (Titus 1:5) that the apostle himself was here at no long interval of time before he wrote the letter. The Cretans were proverbial liars. (

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
100%crete
crete100% · 5×

5 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ὑποπλέωI sail underλιμήνa harbor, portπαραλέγομαιI coast along, s
ἐν
σύ
Κρήτηof Crete
what comes after →
κατά
ΣαλμώνηSalmone
βλέπωI look, see
κατά
κερδαίνωI gain, win, avoid l
τέDisj
ἵναin order that, so th
Article the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

ConcordanceΚρήτη · 5× in the New Testament
Acts Titus
Across the New Testament2 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Embassy to Gaius 282c. AD 40

καὶ οὐ μόνον αἱ ἤπειροι μεσταὶ τῶν Ἰουδαϊκῶν ἀποικιῶν εἰσιν, ἀλλὰ καὶ νήσων αἱ δοκιμώταται, Εὔβοια, Κύπρος, Κρήτη.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 13.argc. AD 75–95

ὡς Δημήτριος ὁ Δημητρίου παῖς πλεύσας εἰς τὴν Συρίαν ἀπὸ Κρήτης καὶ πολεμήσας τὸν Ἀλέξανδρον καὶ κρατήσας αὐτοῦ αὐτὸς ἐβασίλευσεν φιλίαν πρὸς Ἰωνάθην ποιησάμενος.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD
P.Bingen 77Alexandria (?)AD 101–AD 200

ἐλαίου Ἀτταλίου τῆς Κρήτης … τοῦ Σωζομένου … Ἐρινύες Τύχη Ἀσκληπ ἀρτάβαι … ἄγει … … ἐλαίου ἡμικάδια

Unsuitable now the harbor being to winter in the majority reached a decision to set sail from there, if somehow they would be able having arrived at Phoenix to winter [there] — a harbor <the> of Crete looking toward [the] southwest and toward [the] northwest.
βλέπονταblepō looking G991 Verb · present · active · participle · accusative · singular · masculine
133× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To see means to look at or perceive something, whether physically or mentally, as described in Matthew 12:22 and John 9:7. It involves using one's senses to understand or become aware of something, often with the intention of gaining insight or knowledge.
Tyndale gloss
to see
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word βλέπω (i.e., *blepo*) primarily means 'to see' or 'to look at,' encompassing both physical sight and metaphorical perception. It appears in various contexts in the New Testament, such as in Matthew 12:22 and Acts 9:9, where it denotes both literal and figurative understanding. The word can also imply caution or attention, as seen in references to 'bewaring' in Mark 8:15. No significant disagreements among lexicons were noted.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

βλέπω,

[in LXX chiefly for ראה, also for פּנה, etc. ;]

of bodily sight;

to see, have sight (opp. to τυφλὸς εἶναι): Mt 12:22, Jo 9:7, Ac 9:9, Ro 11:8, Re 3:18, al.;

to perceive, look (at), see: absol., Ac 1:9; c. acc., Mt 7:3, Mk 5:31, Lk 6:41, Jo 1:29, al.; ὅραμα, Ac 12:9; γυναῖκα, Mt 5:28; βιβλίον,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

βλέπω ; [impf. ἔβλεπον] ; fut. βλέψω ; 1 aor. ἔβλεψα ; [pres. pass. βλέπομαι]; Sept. for ANI, 739, Tin, wan; in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down; to see, discern; al with the bodily eye; a. to be possessed of sight, have the power of seeing, opp. to τυφλός : Mt. xii. 22: xiii. 16; xy. 31; Jn. ix. 7, 15,19, 25; Acts ix. 9; Ro. xi. 8, 10; Rev. iii. 18, ete. (Soph. Oed. Col. 73; Arstph. Plut. 15; Xen. mem. 1, 3,4; Ael. v. h. 6, 12, ete. Ex. iv. 11; xxiii. 8, ete. Tob. xi. 15). τὸ βλέπειν sight, the power of seeing, Lk. vii. 21 (GL TTrWHom. τό). b. to perceive by the use of the eyes, to see, look, descry; a. absol.: βλεπόντων αὐτῶν while they were looking, Acts i. 9; [xxii 11 Trmrg. WH mrg.]; ἔρχου καὶ βλέπε, Rec. in Rev. vi. 1, 3, 5, 7. β. with ace. of pers. or thing: Mt. vii. 3; xi. 4; xxiv. 2; Mk. v. 31; viii. 23sq.; xiii. 2; Lk. vi. 41; xxiv. 12[T om. L Tr br. WH reject the vs.]; Jn.i. 29…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

βλέπω. The papyri have added a perfect to the paradigm of this verb: it proves to have been βέβλοφα (P Lond 422!—R.c., 168) (=Witkowski?, p. 63) (see under ἐμβλέπω). It is hard to believe that a form so correct historically, and so distant from any obvious analogy, can be anything but a genuine survival, even if it does meet us only ἴῃ ἃ woman’s letter from Ptolemaic Egypt. If this inference is justifiable, the word has a moral for the argument from silence. Βλέπω has primarily the physical sense, as distinguished from ὁρῶ (cf. our cognate ware): this is well seen in ἀναβλέπω = recover sight. Usage bears this out. Thus P Par 445 (B.c. 153) (= Witkowski?, p. 83) has βλέπω Μενέδημον κατατρέχοντά pe coming after ἐγὼ yap ἐνύπνια ὁρῶ πονηρά. Soin P Hal I. 85 (B.C. 232) a man is incapacitated—8.a τὸ μὴ βλέπειν τὰς νύκτας, and in P Oxy I. 399 (a.p. 52) ὀλίγον βλέπων = ** shortsighted.” An…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

βλέπω (blepō) — to see.

βλέπω,

[Refs 6th c.BC+]: imperfect ἔβλεπον [Refs]: future βλέψομαι [Refs 4th c.BC+], Doric dialect infinitive βλεψεῖσθαι [LXX+2nd c.AD+]aorist ἔβλεψα (see. below): perfect βέβλεφα (ἀπο-) [Refs 5th c.AD+]; βέβλοφα (ἐμ-) [Refs 2nd c.AD+] —passive, aorist ἐβλέφθην (προσ-) [Refs 1st c.AD+]perfect βέβλεμμαι to be supplied in [Refs 2nd c.AD+] —chiefly in present and aorist active in early writers: middle (except future) and passive only late:—see, have the power of sight (distinct from ὁρῶ perceive, be aware of,[Refs 5th c.BC+]; μὴ βλέπων ὁ μάντις ᾖ lest he see too clearly, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ βλέπων the seer, Hebraism in [LXX]; ὀλίγον βλέπων short- sighted, [Refs 1st c.AD+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

βλέπω

blepo

a primary verb; to look at (literally or figuratively):--behold,

beware, lie, look (on, to), perceive, regard, see, sight, take heed.

Compare 3700.

see GREEK for 3700

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

βλέπω

v.

I look, see

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

βλέπω blepō 133x

to have the faculty of sight, to see, Mt. 12:22; to exercise sight, to see, Mt. 6:4; to look towards or at, Mt. 22:16; to face, Acts 27:12; to take heed, Mt. 24:4; in NT, βλέπειν ἀπό, to beware of, shun, Mk. 8:15; trans., to cast a look on, Mt. 5:28; to see, behold, Mt. 13:17; to observe, Mt. 7:3; to have an eye to, see to, Mk.…

Read the full entry →
Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

βλέπω to see, have the power of sight, Soph.; μὴ βλέπηι ὁ μάντις lest he see too clearly, id. Soph.

to look, εἴς τινα or τι, Aesch., etc.; πῶς βλέπων; with what face? Soph.;—with an adv., ἐχθρῶς βλ. πρός τινα Xen.:—foll. by a noun, φόβον βλ. to look terror, i. e. to look terrible, Aesch.; ἔβλεψε νᾶπυ looked mustard, Ar.; πυρρίχην βλέπων looking like a war-dancer, id. Ar.; πεφροντικὸς βλέπειν to look thoughtful, Eur.

to look to some one from whom help is expected, Soph.; εἴς τινα id. Soph., etc.:— of places, οἰκία πρὸς μεσημβρίαν βλέπουσα looking towards the south, Xen.

to look longingly, expect eagerly, c. inf., Ar.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PAP-ASM — Verb · present · active · participle · accusative · singular · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PAP-ASM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
14%seeing
seeing14% · 19×do take heed11% · 15×see9% · 12×looking5% · 7×being seen5% · 7×he sees4% · 6×i see4% · 5×we see4% · 5×other renderings44% · 60×

136 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 51 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb94%adverbial5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 133 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
ἀκούωI hear, listenσυνίημιI consider, undeλαλέωI speak, say
Article the
σύπᾶςall, the whole, ὀφθαλμόςthe eye
μήNeg
Article theβλέπωI look, seeτρεῖςthree
οὐNeg
βλέπωI look, seeαὐτόςἔχωI have, hold, po
δέbut, on the other ha
τίςIrgσύἐλπίςhope, expectatio
βλέπωlooking133×
what comes after →
Article the
κάρφοςa dry stalk, chiκαπνόςsmokeπρόσωπονthe face, counte
καίand, even, also, nam
οὐNegἀκούωI hear, listenArticle the
μήNeg
τὶςβλέπωI look, seeπλανάωI lead astray, d
εἰς
πρόσωπονthe face, counteArticle theἀλλήλων
βλέπωI look, see
καίand, even, also,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceβλέπω · 133× in the New Testament
Matthew John Luke Mark Acts Revelation Hebrews 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Romans Colossians Philippians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament16 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 68 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
The Shepherd of Hermas Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 53c. AD 40

βλέπει γὰρ ἑκάτερος, ὁ μὲν τὰ νοητά, ὁ δὲ τὰ αἰσθητά·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.35c. AD 75–95

βλέπων δὲ τὸν Ἄδαμον οὐκ ἔχοντα κοινωνίαν πρὸς τὸ θῆλυ καὶ συνδιαίτησιν, οὐδὲ γὰρ ἦν, ξενιζόμενον δʼ ἐπὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις ζῴοις οὕτως ἔχουσι, μίαν αὐτοῦ κοιμωμένου πλευρὰν ἐξελὼν ἐξ αὐτῆς ἔπλασε γυναῖκα.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.3c. AD 100

ὅτι ἀληθῶς βλέπω ἐν ὑμῖν ἐκκεχυμένον ἀπὸ τοῦ πλουσίου τῆς πηγῆς κυρίου πνεῦμα ἐφ̓ ὑμᾶς.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Oxy. 2 259OxyrhynchosAD 23

με … ἕως ἑαυτὸν αὐτὸν vestiges ποιήσω, εἰ δὲ μὴ ἐμβέβηκεν. ἔρρωσο. βλέπε με πῶς ἡ μήτηρ ἡμῶν ἔσφαξε χάριν τοῦ χειρογράφου … ω … αφ

P.Oxy. 2 317 descr.AlexandriaAD 52

Σεβαστῆι. ἀπελύθη ὑπὸ Γναίου Οὐεργιλλίου Καπίτωνος τοῦ ἡγεμόνος ἀμφοτέρων Τρύφων Διονυσίου γέρδιος, ὑποκεχυμένος ὀλίγον βλέπων, τῶν ἀπʼ Ὀξυρύγχων τῆς μητροπόλεως. ἐπεκρίθη ἐν Ἀλεξανδρείᾳ. ἐπεκρίθη ἐν Ἀλεξανδρείᾳ. ἐπικέκριται ἐν…

ἐὰν δὲ μὴ μέλλῃς ἔρχεσθαι, πάλιν μοι ἐξαυτῆς φάσιν πέμψον, ἵνα ὧδε αὐτὰ ἀναβάλω. βλέπε οὖν, μὴ ἄλλως ποιήσῃς. ἔρρωσο. ἔτους β Σερουίου Γάλβα Αὐτοκράτορος Καίσαρος Σεβαστοῦ, Φαῶφι θ.

Unsuitable now the harbor being to winter in the majority reached a decision to set sail from there, if somehow they would be able having arrived at Phoenix to winter [there] — a harbor <the> of Crete looking toward [the] southwest and toward [the] northwest.
κατὰkata toward G2596 Preposition
473× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
According to means following or matching something. In the Bible, it's used to talk about things happening in line with God's plan or will, like in Matthew 8:32 and Mark 5:13.
Tyndale gloss
according to
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

κατά (kata) is a preposition used with the genitive and accusative cases, primarily meaning 'down' or 'against.' It indicates direction, motion, or relation, appearing in various contexts such as 'down from' (e.g., Mt 8:32) and 'against' (e.g., Mk 9:40). The word also conveys meanings like 'throughout' and 'according to.' Lexicons note its frequent use in the New Testament, with some variations in application.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

κατά (bef. a vowel κατ’, καθ’; on the freq. neglect of elision, v. Tdf., Pr., 95; WH, App., 146a),

prep. c. gen., acc.,

down, downwards.

C. gen. (WM, § 47, k; Bl., § 42, 2).

C. gen. rei, in local sense;

down, down from: Mt 8:32, Mk 5:13, Lk 8:33, I Co 11:4;

throughout (late usage; Bl., § 42, 2): κ. ὅλης κ.τ.λ., Lk 4:14 23:5, Ac 9:31 10:37;

in a peculiar adjectival phrase: ἡ κ. βάθους πτωχεία, deep or extreme poverty, II Co 8:2.

C. gen. pers., usually in hostile sense;

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

κατά, [on its neglect of elision before a vowel see Tf. Proleg. p. 95; cf. W. § 5, 1a.; B.10; WH. App. p. 1405], a preposition denoting motion or diffusion or direction from the higher to the lower; as in class. Grk., joined with the gen. and the acc. I. With the Genitive (W. § 47, k. p. 381 (357); [B. § 147, 20]); 1. prop. a. down from, down: κατὰ κατά 8 τοῦ κρημνοῦ, Mt. viii. 32; ΜΚ. v.13; Lk. viii. 33; κατέχεεν κατὰ τῆς κεφαλῆς (so that it flowed down from his head [οἷς W. 381 (357) note]; but it is more correct here to omit κατά with LT Tr WH; see καταχέω), Mk. xiv. 3; hence κατὰ κεφαλῆς (a veil hanging down from his head) ἔχων, 1 Co. xi. 4 ([Δ. V. having his head covered] cf. καταπέτασμα [or rather κάλυμμα (q. v.), but 566 ἔχω I. 1b.]). Ὁ. down upon (down into) anything: Acts xxvii. 14 [W. 381 (357) note!; ef. B.D. Am. ed. s. ν. Crete]; trop. 7 κατὰ βάθους πτωχεία reaching down…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

κατά, the favourite preposition of Polybius, by whom it is often used in place of ἐν, eis, and περί (Krebs Pra. p. 4), is also found with considerable variety of application in the NT, where it occurs 73 times c. gen., and 391 times c. acc. (cf. Proleg. p. 105). Brugmann (Awrze Vergletchende Grammazk, p. 479) considers that the earliest use of the word was “‘along ” something, so as to remain in connexion and contact with the object, and from this most of the senses found in the NT can be derived. I. (1) Turning to the construction c. gen. we find that the meaning ‘‘along” has passed into ‘‘down,” a usage not found in ΜΟΥ, in such passages as P Petr II. 18(26)!° (B.c. a ἐπιπεσὼν ἔτυπτεν [ad]t[o]v κατὰ τοῦ τραχήλου, Chest. τοῦ πνοήν: ἐξ Mt 8%, r Cor 114, 2 Cor 8%. (2) This in turn becomes ‘‘ against,” as in Mt τοῦδ, Mk 14°5, e.g. P Eleph 115 (B.c. 311-0) (= Se/ections, p. 4) ὅπου ἂν…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

κατά (kata) — according to.

κατά [κᾰτᾰ],

poetry καταί accusative to [Refs 2nd c.AD+]: preposition with genitive or accusative:— downwards.

__A WITH GEN.,

__A.I denoting motion from above, down from, βῆ δὲ κατ᾽ Οὐλύμποιο καρήνων, κατ᾽ Ἰδαίων ὀρέων, βαλέειν κ. πέτρης, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; καθ᾽ ἵππων ἀΐξαντε[Refs 5th c.BC+] — for κατ᾽ ἄκρης see.{ἄκρα}: Μοῖσα κ. στόματος Χέε νέκταρ [Refs 3rd c.BC+]

__A.II denoting downward motion,

__A.II.1 down upon or over, κ. Χθονὸς ὄμματα πήξας [Refs 8th c.BC+]; of the dying, κατὰ.. ὀφθαλμῶν κέχυτ᾽ ἀχλύς a cloud settled upon the eyes, [Refs]; φᾶρος κὰκ κεφαλῆς εἴρυσσε down over.. , [Refs 8th c.BC+]; [κόπρος] κ. σπείους κέχυτο.. πολλή [Refs]; ὕδωρ κ. Χειρός, see at {Χεί; μύρον κ. τῆς κεφαλῆς καταχέαντες} [Refs…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

κατά

kata

a primary particle; (prepositionally) down (in place or time), in

varied relations (according to the case (genitive, dative or

accusative) with which it is joined):--about, according as (to),

after, against, (when they were) X alone, among, and, X apart, (even,

like) as (concerning, pertaining to touching), X aside, at, before,

beyond, by, to the charge of, (charita-)bly, concerning, + covered,

(dai-)ly, down, every, (+ far more) exceeding, X more excellent, for,

from ... to, godly, in(-asmuch, divers, every, -to, respect of), ...

by, after the manner of, + by any means, beyond (out of) measure, X

mightily, more, X natural, of (up-)on (X part), out (of every), over

against, (+ your) X own, + particularly, so, through(-oughout,

-oughout every), thus, (un-)to(-gether, -ward), X uttermost,

where(-by), with. In composition it retains many of these

Read the full entry →
Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

κατά

Prep.

down from, against, according to, throughout, during

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

κατά kata 473x

down from, Mt. 8:32; down upon, upon, Mk. 14:3; Acts 27:14; down into; κατὰ βάθους, profound, deepest, 2 Cor. 8:2; down over, throughout a space, Lk. 4:14; 23:5; concerning, in cases of pointed allegation, 1 Cor. 15:15; against, Mt. 12:30; by, in oaths, Mt. 26:63; with an acc. of place, in the quarter of, about, near, at, Lk. 10;32; Acts 2:10; throughout, Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
45%according to
according to45% · 215×against12% · 57×in9% · 42×every5% · 24×by5% · 23×on3% · 13×other renderings15% · 72×other renderings7% · 34×

480 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 48 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial86%object5%predicate5%subject3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 473 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
καίand, even, also,πᾶςall, the whole, ἄνθρωποςa man, one of th
αὐτός
ποιέωI do, makeγυνήa woman, wife, mλαλέωI speak, say
καίand, even, also, nam
ἑκατόνIndecμέγαςσύ
οὐNeg
καίand, even, also,ἀλλάbut, exceptἔρχομαιI come, go
ἐγώ
μετάσυλλαμβάνωI seize, appreheγίνομαιI come into bein
κατάtoward473×
what comes after →
Article the
νόμοςa law, the Mosaiἔργονwork, labor, actαὐτός
σάρξflesh, body
περιπατέωI walk, conduct ζάωI liveοὐNeg
ἴδιοςone’s own, private,
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,δέbut, on the othe
ἡμέραa day
ἐνεἰμίI am, existκαίand, even, also,
αὐτός
ὅπωςhow, in order thκαίand, even, also,λέγωI say, speak

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκατά · 473× in the New Testament
Acts Romans Luke Hebrews Matthew 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians Ephesians Mark Galatians Colossians Philippians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome The Shepherd of Hermas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 3c. AD 40

ἡ δ’ ἀρχή, καθάπερ ἔφην, ἐστὶ θαυμασιωτάτη κοσμοποιίαν περιέχουσα, ὡς καὶ τοῦ κόσμου τῷ νόμῳ καὶ τοῦ νόμου τῷ κόσμῳ συνᾴδοντος καὶ τοῦ νομίμου ἀνδρὸς εὐθὺς ὄντος κοσμοπολίτου πρὸς τὸ βούλημα τῆς φύσεως τὰς πράξεις ἀπευθύνοντος, καθ’ ἣν καὶ ὁ σύμπας…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.7c. AD 75–95

ἀλλʼ ἐπειδὴ μείζων ἦν ἡ τοῦδε τοῦ λόγου περιβολή, κατʼ αὐτὸν ἐκεῖνον χωρίσας ταῖς ἰδίαις ἀρχαῖς αὐτοῦ καὶ τῷ τέλει τὴν γραφὴν συνεμέτρησα·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 2nd c. BC 6th c. AD 3rd c. BC
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

ἐπρίατο Πετεαρσεμθεὺς Πανοβχούνιος ὡς ἐτῶν μ χαλκοῦ τάλαντα δύο . προπωλητὴς καὶ βεβαιωτὴς τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην πάντων Πετεαρσεμθεὺς ὁ ἀποδόμενος, ὃν ἐδέξατο Πετεαρσεμθεὺς ὁ πριάμενος. Ἑρμίας ὁ

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

ἐπρίατο Πακοῖβις Πατοῦτος ὡς ἐτῶν λ χαλκοῦ δραχμῶν τρισχιλίων . προπωληταὶ καὶ βεβαιωταὶ τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην πάντων Νεχούτης καὶ ὁ σὺν αὐτῷ οἱ ἀποδόμενοι, ὃν ἐδέξατο Πακοῖβις

BGU 3 1000Pathyris99 BC

μελίχρως τετανὸς μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν χαλκοῦ δραχμὰς δισχιλίας καὶ διακοσίας . προπωλητὴς καὶ βεβαιωτὴς τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην πάντων Πανοβχοῦνις ὁ ἀποδόμενος, ὃν ἐδέξατο Εὔνους ὁ πριάμενος. Ἑρμίας ὁ

Unsuitable now the harbor being to winter in the majority reached a decision to set sail from there, if somehow they would be able having arrived at Phoenix to winter [there] — a harbor <the> of Crete looking toward [the] southwest and toward [the] northwest.
λίβαlips [the] southwest G3047 Noun · accusative · singular · masculine
1× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The southwest wind brings rain, as seen in Acts 27:12. It refers to the south quarter. In the Bible, it is associated with rain and is mentioned in Acts. The southwest wind is also referenced in relation to navigation and geography.
Amplified meaning
the southwest wind
Tyndale gloss
southwest
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

λίψ is a noun meaning 'southwest wind,' derived from the idea of pouring out, as in a libation. It appears in various contexts, particularly in the Septuagint, and is referenced in Acts 27:12. The term can also denote the southwest quarter of the heavens, with some lexicons noting its use in astronomy.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

λίψ, λιβός, ὁ,

[in LXX chiefly for נֶגֶב, also for תֵּימָן, מַעֲרָבָה, etc., Ge 13:14, Nu 2:10, II Ch 32:30, al.;]

the SW. wind: βλέποντα κατὰ λ., Ac 27:12 (v. Page, in l.; Deiss., BS, 141).†

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

λίψ (lips) — southwest.

λίψ, ὁ,

__Agenitive λιβός, the SW. wind, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

__A.2 the South, frequently in [LXX]

__A.3 the West, opposed to ἀπηλιώτης, [LXX+2nd c.BC+]; λιβός or λίβα εἰς ἀπηλιώτην from [Refs 1st c.AD+]

__A.4 Astron., πρωινὸς λ., μεσημβρινὸς λ., ὀψινὸς λ., position of a star on the W. horizon at sunrise, midday, or sunset, [Refs 1st c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

λίψ

lips

probably from leibo (to pour a "libation"); the south(- west) wind (as

bringing rain, i.e. (by extension) the south quarter):--southwest.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

λίψ, λιβός, ὁ

n.m.

the south-west wind

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

λίψ lips 1x

pr. the south-west wind; meton. the south-west quarter of the heavens, Acts 27:12*

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-ASM — Noun · accusative · singular · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
100%southwest
southwest100% · 1×

1 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

Concordanceλίψ · 1× in the New Testament
Acts
Across the New Testament1 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 21 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn Dreams 1.3c. AD 40

ἡ γῆ, ἐφ’ ἧς σὺ καθεύδεις, σοὶ δώσω αὐτὴν καὶ τῷ σπέρματί σου, καὶ ἔσται τὸ σπέρμα σου ὡς ἡ ἄμμος τῆς γῆς, καὶ πλατυνθήσεται ἐπὶ θάλασσαν καὶ λίβα καὶ βορρᾶν καὶ ἀνατολάς· καὶ ἐνευλογηθήσονται ἐν σοὶ πᾶσαι αἱ φυλαὶ τῆς γῆς καὶ ἐν τῷ σπέρματί σου.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 3.294c. AD 75–95

τρίτον δὲ σημήναντος τὸ κατὰ λίβα τετραμμένον τῶν ἐσκηνωκότων μέρος ἐκινεῖτο, καὶ τέταρτον τὸ κατὰ βορρᾶν.

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 10.4c. AD 96

Ἀναβλέψας τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς σου ἴδε ἀπὸ τοῦ τόπου, οὖ νῦν σὺ εἶ, πρὸς βορρᾶν καὶ λίβα καὶ ἀνατολὰς καὶ θάλασσαν, ὅτι πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν, ἣν σὺ ὁρᾷς, σοὶ δώσω αὐτὴν καὶ τῷ σπέρματί σου ἕως αἰῶνος.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
1st c. AD 2nd c. AD 6th c. AD 3rd c. AD 7th c. AD
P.Mich. 5 241Tebtynis (ArsinoitesAD 16

πάντων ἐν Τεβτύνει τῆς Πολέμονος μερίδος ὧν μέτρα νότον ἐπὶ βορρᾶν πήχεις η 𐅵, λίβα ἐπʼ ἀπηλιώτην πήχεις ιγ· γείτονες νότου τῆς πριαμένης Τατιθίγξιος καὶ τοῦ υἱοῦ αἴθριον, βορρᾶ

ZPE 156 (2006), p. 199-216Soknopaiu Nesos (ArsinoitesAD 50

μερῶν πέντε οἰκίας ἀνῳκοδομημένης ἐστεγασμένης τεθυρωμένης μονοστέγου καὶ δεκάτου μέρους αὐλῆς ἐκ τοῦ πρὸς λίβα μέρους κοινῶν καὶ ἀδιαιρέτων καὶ δεκάτου μέρους ψιλοῦ τόπου ἐν β σφραγῖσι καὶ τῶν

P.Iand. 4 52Theadelphia (Arsinoites)AD 96

ὁμοίως λελογχέναι εἰς τὸ καὶ αὐτῷ ἐπιβάλλον ἥμισυ μέρος … καὶ ἐκ τοῦ πρὸς λίβα μέρους ὅλων τῶν μ … … … … λ … υ … … δα

Unsuitable now the harbor being to winter in the majority reached a decision to set sail from there, if somehow they would be able having arrived at Phoenix to winter [there] — a harbor <the> of Crete looking toward [the] southwest and toward [the] northwest.
καὶkai and G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
Article theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίand8978×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

Unsuitable now the harbor being to winter in the majority reached a decision to set sail from there, if somehow they would be able having arrived at Phoenix to winter [there] — a harbor <the> of Crete looking toward [the] southwest and toward [the] northwest.
κατὰkata toward G2596 Preposition
473× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
According to means following or matching something. In the Bible, it's used to talk about things happening in line with God's plan or will, like in Matthew 8:32 and Mark 5:13.
Tyndale gloss
according to
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

κατά (kata) is a preposition used with the genitive and accusative cases, primarily meaning 'down' or 'against.' It indicates direction, motion, or relation, appearing in various contexts such as 'down from' (e.g., Mt 8:32) and 'against' (e.g., Mk 9:40). The word also conveys meanings like 'throughout' and 'according to.' Lexicons note its frequent use in the New Testament, with some variations in application.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

κατά (bef. a vowel κατ’, καθ’; on the freq. neglect of elision, v. Tdf., Pr., 95; WH, App., 146a),

prep. c. gen., acc.,

down, downwards.

C. gen. (WM, § 47, k; Bl., § 42, 2).

C. gen. rei, in local sense;

down, down from: Mt 8:32, Mk 5:13, Lk 8:33, I Co 11:4;

throughout (late usage; Bl., § 42, 2): κ. ὅλης κ.τ.λ., Lk 4:14 23:5, Ac 9:31 10:37;

in a peculiar adjectival phrase: ἡ κ. βάθους πτωχεία, deep or extreme poverty, II Co 8:2.

C. gen. pers., usually in hostile sense;

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

κατά, [on its neglect of elision before a vowel see Tf. Proleg. p. 95; cf. W. § 5, 1a.; B.10; WH. App. p. 1405], a preposition denoting motion or diffusion or direction from the higher to the lower; as in class. Grk., joined with the gen. and the acc. I. With the Genitive (W. § 47, k. p. 381 (357); [B. § 147, 20]); 1. prop. a. down from, down: κατὰ κατά 8 τοῦ κρημνοῦ, Mt. viii. 32; ΜΚ. v.13; Lk. viii. 33; κατέχεεν κατὰ τῆς κεφαλῆς (so that it flowed down from his head [οἷς W. 381 (357) note]; but it is more correct here to omit κατά with LT Tr WH; see καταχέω), Mk. xiv. 3; hence κατὰ κεφαλῆς (a veil hanging down from his head) ἔχων, 1 Co. xi. 4 ([Δ. V. having his head covered] cf. καταπέτασμα [or rather κάλυμμα (q. v.), but 566 ἔχω I. 1b.]). Ὁ. down upon (down into) anything: Acts xxvii. 14 [W. 381 (357) note!; ef. B.D. Am. ed. s. ν. Crete]; trop. 7 κατὰ βάθους πτωχεία reaching down…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

κατά, the favourite preposition of Polybius, by whom it is often used in place of ἐν, eis, and περί (Krebs Pra. p. 4), is also found with considerable variety of application in the NT, where it occurs 73 times c. gen., and 391 times c. acc. (cf. Proleg. p. 105). Brugmann (Awrze Vergletchende Grammazk, p. 479) considers that the earliest use of the word was “‘along ” something, so as to remain in connexion and contact with the object, and from this most of the senses found in the NT can be derived. I. (1) Turning to the construction c. gen. we find that the meaning ‘‘along” has passed into ‘‘down,” a usage not found in ΜΟΥ, in such passages as P Petr II. 18(26)!° (B.c. a ἐπιπεσὼν ἔτυπτεν [ad]t[o]v κατὰ τοῦ τραχήλου, Chest. τοῦ πνοήν: ἐξ Mt 8%, r Cor 114, 2 Cor 8%. (2) This in turn becomes ‘‘ against,” as in Mt τοῦδ, Mk 14°5, e.g. P Eleph 115 (B.c. 311-0) (= Se/ections, p. 4) ὅπου ἂν…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

κατά (kata) — according to.

κατά [κᾰτᾰ],

poetry καταί accusative to [Refs 2nd c.AD+]: preposition with genitive or accusative:— downwards.

__A WITH GEN.,

__A.I denoting motion from above, down from, βῆ δὲ κατ᾽ Οὐλύμποιο καρήνων, κατ᾽ Ἰδαίων ὀρέων, βαλέειν κ. πέτρης, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; καθ᾽ ἵππων ἀΐξαντε[Refs 5th c.BC+] — for κατ᾽ ἄκρης see.{ἄκρα}: Μοῖσα κ. στόματος Χέε νέκταρ [Refs 3rd c.BC+]

__A.II denoting downward motion,

__A.II.1 down upon or over, κ. Χθονὸς ὄμματα πήξας [Refs 8th c.BC+]; of the dying, κατὰ.. ὀφθαλμῶν κέχυτ᾽ ἀχλύς a cloud settled upon the eyes, [Refs]; φᾶρος κὰκ κεφαλῆς εἴρυσσε down over.. , [Refs 8th c.BC+]; [κόπρος] κ. σπείους κέχυτο.. πολλή [Refs]; ὕδωρ κ. Χειρός, see at {Χεί; μύρον κ. τῆς κεφαλῆς καταχέαντες} [Refs…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

κατά

kata

a primary particle; (prepositionally) down (in place or time), in

varied relations (according to the case (genitive, dative or

accusative) with which it is joined):--about, according as (to),

after, against, (when they were) X alone, among, and, X apart, (even,

like) as (concerning, pertaining to touching), X aside, at, before,

beyond, by, to the charge of, (charita-)bly, concerning, + covered,

(dai-)ly, down, every, (+ far more) exceeding, X more excellent, for,

from ... to, godly, in(-asmuch, divers, every, -to, respect of), ...

by, after the manner of, + by any means, beyond (out of) measure, X

mightily, more, X natural, of (up-)on (X part), out (of every), over

against, (+ your) X own, + particularly, so, through(-oughout,

-oughout every), thus, (un-)to(-gether, -ward), X uttermost,

where(-by), with. In composition it retains many of these

Read the full entry →
Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

κατά

Prep.

down from, against, according to, throughout, during

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

κατά kata 473x

down from, Mt. 8:32; down upon, upon, Mk. 14:3; Acts 27:14; down into; κατὰ βάθους, profound, deepest, 2 Cor. 8:2; down over, throughout a space, Lk. 4:14; 23:5; concerning, in cases of pointed allegation, 1 Cor. 15:15; against, Mt. 12:30; by, in oaths, Mt. 26:63; with an acc. of place, in the quarter of, about, near, at, Lk. 10;32; Acts 2:10; throughout, Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
45%according to
according to45% · 215×against12% · 57×in9% · 42×every5% · 24×by5% · 23×on3% · 13×other renderings15% · 72×other renderings7% · 34×

480 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 48 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial86%object5%predicate5%subject3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 473 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
καίand, even, also,πᾶςall, the whole, ἄνθρωποςa man, one of th
αὐτός
ποιέωI do, makeγυνήa woman, wife, mλαλέωI speak, say
καίand, even, also, nam
ἑκατόνIndecμέγαςσύ
οὐNeg
καίand, even, also,ἀλλάbut, exceptἔρχομαιI come, go
ἐγώ
μετάσυλλαμβάνωI seize, appreheγίνομαιI come into bein
κατάtoward473×
what comes after →
Article the
νόμοςa law, the Mosaiἔργονwork, labor, actαὐτός
σάρξflesh, body
περιπατέωI walk, conduct ζάωI liveοὐNeg
ἴδιοςone’s own, private,
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,δέbut, on the othe
ἡμέραa day
ἐνεἰμίI am, existκαίand, even, also,
αὐτός
ὅπωςhow, in order thκαίand, even, also,λέγωI say, speak

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκατά · 473× in the New Testament
Acts Romans Luke Hebrews Matthew 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians Ephesians Mark Galatians Colossians Philippians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome The Shepherd of Hermas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 3c. AD 40

ἡ δ’ ἀρχή, καθάπερ ἔφην, ἐστὶ θαυμασιωτάτη κοσμοποιίαν περιέχουσα, ὡς καὶ τοῦ κόσμου τῷ νόμῳ καὶ τοῦ νόμου τῷ κόσμῳ συνᾴδοντος καὶ τοῦ νομίμου ἀνδρὸς εὐθὺς ὄντος κοσμοπολίτου πρὸς τὸ βούλημα τῆς φύσεως τὰς πράξεις ἀπευθύνοντος, καθ’ ἣν καὶ ὁ σύμπας…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.7c. AD 75–95

ἀλλʼ ἐπειδὴ μείζων ἦν ἡ τοῦδε τοῦ λόγου περιβολή, κατʼ αὐτὸν ἐκεῖνον χωρίσας ταῖς ἰδίαις ἀρχαῖς αὐτοῦ καὶ τῷ τέλει τὴν γραφὴν συνεμέτρησα·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 2nd c. BC 6th c. AD 3rd c. BC
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

ἐπρίατο Πετεαρσεμθεὺς Πανοβχούνιος ὡς ἐτῶν μ χαλκοῦ τάλαντα δύο . προπωλητὴς καὶ βεβαιωτὴς τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην πάντων Πετεαρσεμθεὺς ὁ ἀποδόμενος, ὃν ἐδέξατο Πετεαρσεμθεὺς ὁ πριάμενος. Ἑρμίας ὁ

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

ἐπρίατο Πακοῖβις Πατοῦτος ὡς ἐτῶν λ χαλκοῦ δραχμῶν τρισχιλίων . προπωληταὶ καὶ βεβαιωταὶ τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην πάντων Νεχούτης καὶ ὁ σὺν αὐτῷ οἱ ἀποδόμενοι, ὃν ἐδέξατο Πακοῖβις

BGU 3 1000Pathyris99 BC

μελίχρως τετανὸς μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν χαλκοῦ δραχμὰς δισχιλίας καὶ διακοσίας . προπωλητὴς καὶ βεβαιωτὴς τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην πάντων Πανοβχοῦνις ὁ ἀποδόμενος, ὃν ἐδέξατο Εὔνους ὁ πριάμενος. Ἑρμίας ὁ

Unsuitable now the harbor being to winter in the majority reached a decision to set sail from there, if somehow they would be able having arrived at Phoenix to winter [there] — a harbor <the> of Crete looking toward [the] southwest and toward [the] northwest.
χῶρον.¶chōros [the] northwest. G5566 Noun · accusative · singular · masculine
1× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The northwest wind, as in the Bible it refers to a specific wind direction.
Amplified meaning
the northwest wind
Tyndale gloss
northwest
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word χῶρος (lemma: choros) refers specifically to the northwest wind, known in Latin as 'corus' or 'caurus.' It appears in Acts 27:12. Additionally, it can function as a preposition meaning 'apart from' or 'without,' used in various contexts in ancient texts. The lexicons consistently define it as a directional term related to wind.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

*† χῶρος, -ου, ὁ

(Lat. corus), the N.W. wind: Ac 27:12.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

χῶρος, -ov, 6, the north-west wind (Lat. Corus or Caurus): for the quarter of the heavens from which this wind blows, Acts xxvii. 12 (on which see Ady, 2).

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

χῶρος 2. as prep. c. gen. ‘‘apart from,” ‘‘ without”: (a) of persons—P Oxy VI. 9321° (late ii/A.D.) τὰ χοιρίδια χωρὶς μοῦ μὴ πώλι, ‘do not sell the young pigs without me” (Edd.), and BGU III. 9204 (a.p, 180-181) χωρὶς κυρίου κατὰ τὰ “Pwpatfwv ἔθη. (b) of things—P Tebt I. 61 (α)} Ὁ (B.c. 118-117) χωρὶς σπέρματος Kal τῆς ἄλλης δα(πάνης), P Oxy IX. 1211" (medical receipt—ii/a.p.) πᾶν ἄρωμα χωρὶς λιβάνου, ‘every spice except frankincense.”’ (c) of abstract nouns (cf. Philem!, and the equivalent P Tebt I. 104*8 (8.6, 92) ἄνευ τῆς Φιλίσκου γνώ[μ]ης)--P Oxy IL. 237% 25 (a.p. 186) χωρὶς λόγον, 2. VIII. 112871 (A.D. 173) χωρὶς ὑπερθέσεως, “without delay,” and 76. VIII. 1130! (A.D. 484) χωρὶς ἐνγραφοῦς ἐντάγιον (= -lov), ‘‘ without a written deed.” 3 = ‘“‘besides”: (a) the object being excluded—P Oxy VIII. 112418 (A.D. 26) χωρὶς τῶν προκειμένων, ‘apart from the amounts aforesaid,” P Ryl 11. 1381%…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

χῶρος (chōros) — northwest.

χῶρος, ὁ,

north-west wind, Latin corus, [NT]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

χῶρος

choros

of Latin origin; the north-west wind:--north west.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

χῶρος, ου, ὁ

n.m.

the north-west wind

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

χῶρος chōros 1x

Corus, or Caurus, the northwest wind; meton, the northwest quarter of the heavens, Acts 27:12*

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-ASM — Noun · accusative · singular · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
100%northwest
northwest100% · 1×

1 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

Concordanceχῶρος (II) · 1× in the New Testament
Acts
Across the New Testament1 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 3.116c. AD 40

ἐὰν οὖν ποτε ζητῇς, ὦ διάνοια, τίνα χῶρον ἡδονὴ κεκλήρωται, μὴ σκέπτου τὸν περὶ κεφαλὴν τόπον, ὅπου τὸ λογιστικόν, οὐ γὰρ μὴ εὑρήσεις, ἐπεὶ μάχεται ὁ λόγος τῷ πάθει καὶ ἐν ταὐτῷ μένειν οὐ δύναται·

JosephusThe Jewish War 1.39c. AD 75–95

κυριεύσας δὲ τοῦ ἱεροῦ τόν τε χῶρον ἐκάθηρε πάντα καὶ περιετείχισε καὶ τὰ πρὸς τὰς λειτουργίας σκεύη καινὰ κατασκευάσας εἰς τὸν ναὸν εἰσήνεγκεν ὡς τῶν προτέρων μεμιαμμένων, βωμόν τε ᾠκοδόμησεν ἕτερον καὶ τῶν ἐναγισμῶν ἤρξατο.

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 50.3c. AD 96

αἱ γενεαὶ πᾶσαι ἀπὸ Ἀδὰμ ἕως τῆσδε τῆς ἡμέρας παρῆλθον, ἀλλ̓ οἱ ἐν ἀγάπῃ τελειωθέντες κατὰ τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ χάριν ἔχουσιν χῶρον εὐσεβῶν, οἳ φανερωθήσονται ἐν τῇ ἐπισκοπῇ τῆς βασιλείας τοῦ Χριστοῦ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD 7th c. AD
P.Hib. 2 197Alexandria (?)276 BC–227 BC

ἢ οἰκόπεδα … … ον ἢ κέραμον ἢ σμήνη ἐνεχυράζηι … … καὶ τὸν χῶρον οὗ ἂν ἦι καὶ ἐπωνυμίαν ἥντινα ἔχηι … … καὶ τὸ πλῆθος τῆς γῆς

O.Heid. 396Arsinoites (?)AD 251–AD 300

μιατος δίχωρον α ὀρνι δ Φιλοκῦριν δίχωρον α Ἡρωνν … … σ … χωρον α ἀρτάβη α Ἀγάθων δίχωρον α ὀρνι β Τρύφωνος γραμματέως ἁλιέων κεράμιον ταριχίων ὀρνι

P.Michael 38AD 501–AD 600

ἵνα δυνήθω τὰς πάντων ὑμῶν κελεύσεις ἀποπληρῶσαι καὶ … … … περα … ειον χῶρον … … … … οντος τοὺς δὲ χοίρους ὀν

Sources on this page. Lexicons and dictionaries imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones, Robinson and Packard, Webster and Cawdrey. Thayer’s Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament (Harper, 1889 — Grimm’s Wilke’s Clavis Novi Testamenti, translated, revised and enlarged by Joseph Henry Thayer) is public domain and is set here from the Internet Archive page scan greekenglishlex00grim; it is uncorrected OCR, marked as such on the entry itself, and the Strong’s numbers — which Thayer’s own edition does not carry — were matched by lemma against the other modules on this page. Trench’s Synonyms of the New Testament (Macmillan, 1880) and Moulton and Milligan’s Vocabulary of the Greek Testament (Hodder & Stoughton, 1930, which entered the United States public domain on 1 January 2026) are set from Internet Archive page scans synonymsofnewtes00treniala and vocabularyofgree00mouluoft, and are likewise uncorrected OCR matched to Strong’s numbers by lemma. Trench treats a group of words at once, so the same essay stands on the page of each word it compares. The Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary is © 1993 and is used here by permission for non-commercial use, www.teknia.com/greek-dictionary. The full Liddell-Scott-Jones and the Hebrew word data (TAHOT) come from STEPBible.org, CC BY 4.0. Brown-Driver-Briggs is the OpenScriptures digitisation, public domain. Syntax analysis is the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (biblicalhumanities.org); the concordance and morphology are built from the tagged Nestle 1904 text. Septuagint occurrences use the Open Scriptures Septuagint lemma index, derived from CCAT (University of Pennsylvania) and the Rahlfs 1935 dataset by Eliran Wong, CC BY-NC-SA 4.0 — used here on a non-commercial ministry site. Greek of Josephus and Barnabas from the Perseus Digital Library, CC BY-SA 4.0. Commentaries and the Ante-Nicene Fathers are public-domain texts hosted on this site. Everyday Greek from the Duke Databank of Documentary Papyri, CC BY 3.0, with dates and provenance from the Heidelberger Gesamtverzeichnis. Philo and the Apostolic Fathers from Open Greek and Latin (First1KGreek), CC BY-SA 4.0. The apparatus and the fifth Greek column are the SBL Greek New Testament, © 2010 SBL and Logos Bible Software, CC BY 4.0. The Latin is the Clementine Vulgate (public domain); the Syriac New Testament is the ETCBC edition (MIT licence). The Hebrew behind the Greek is computed here from the Septuagint index and TAHOT, not taken from any aligned edition. The translation spread and the per-word edition marks come from the Translators Amalgamated Greek NT (STEPBible, CC BY 4.0); clause roles from the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (CC BY-SA 4.0); place identifications and their confidence from OpenBible.info Bible Geocoding (CC BY 4.0), with map tiles © OpenStreetMap contributors. Gospel parallels are computed here from shared uncommon vocabulary, not taken from any printed harmony. Cross references are the Treasury of Scripture Knowledge and the subject headings are Nave’s Topical Bible, both public domain. Works under Creative Commons licences are used unchanged apart from markup removal.

Everything we make is available for free because of a generous community of supporters.

Donate